JP5752168B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game called pachislot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, lottery processing using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery processing”) is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the symbol combination related to the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player.

  As an example of a privilege granted to a player, a replay (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which an internal lottery process is performed again without paying out game media (medals, etc.) or consuming the game media. An operation of a bonus game in which a game medium payout opportunity increases can be cited.

  In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, various types of gaming machines having a function of performing a predetermined effect by using, for example, a mechanical operation, a light emitting operation, or both of these operations have been proposed. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

  For example, Patent Literature 1 includes a game board, a front door body provided with a transparent window for visually recognizing the game board so that the game board can be visually recognized, and a directing effect provided on the front door body or the game board. A game machine has been proposed. In this gaming machine, as a decorative part, a fixed part fixed to the front door or the game board, a light emitting rotating member having a light emitting part provided in a rotatable state on the fixed part, and a light emitting rotating member are driven to rotate. Rotation driving means is provided. The power of the rotation driving means is transmitted to a rotation shaft fixed to the light emitting rotation member via a gear. Thereby, a light emission rotation member rotates with respect to a fixing | fixed part.

  In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Literature 1, it is expected that the player's attention to the effect display is more strongly evoked by providing the effect agent having the light emitting rotating member on the front door body.

JP 2011-115212 A

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, since the weight of the light emitting rotating member is added to the rotating shaft, a large load is applied to the rotating shaft. And when a rotating shaft deform | transforms with load, it becomes difficult to transmit the motive power from a rotation drive means, and it becomes impossible to perform the effect by a light emission rotation member at an appropriate timing with respect to a player. In addition, since the power from the rotation driving unit becomes difficult to be transmitted, the load on the rotation driving unit is increased, so that there is a possibility that the life of the rendering agent is shortened.

  This invention is made | formed in view of the said situation, The objective of this invention is providing the game machine which can reduce the load to the rotating shaft part to which the rotation decoration member was fixed.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A gaming machine housing (for example, an exterior body 2 to be described later) having a cabinet and a front door attached to the cabinet so as to be opened and closed;
A rotating decorative member (for example, a rotating member 25 described later) that is provided on the front door and performs a predetermined effect;
A rotation decoration part drive unit (for example, a rotation decoration part drive circuit 94 to be described later) that is mounted inside the gaming machine casing and rotationally drives the rotation decoration member;
A rotational position detection mechanism (for example, rotational position detection mechanism 26 described later) provided on the front door for detecting the rotational position of the rotational decoration member;
A rotation decoration unit effect control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 42 described later) that is mounted inside the gaming machine casing and controls the operation of the rotation decoration member at the time of the predetermined effect;
With
The rotation decoration unit drive unit selects a specific rotation operation process from a plurality of types of rotation operation processes (for example, operation sequences shown in FIGS. 8 to 10 described later) when performing the predetermined effect , In accordance with the selected rotation operation processing, the rotation decoration member is operated so that the rotation decoration member repeats forward rotation and reverse rotation sequentially from the basic position ,
The plural types of rotation operation processes are different in a stop period (“stop (with excitation)” operation in the order “9” described later) set between the forward rotation and the reverse rotation,
The rotation decoration portion effect control unit rotates the rotation decoration member when a predetermined operation (for example, a third stop operation of a reel described later) that triggers the stop of the predetermined effect by the rotation decoration member is detected. Based on the information on the situation, a specific stop operation process is selected from a plurality of types of stop operation processes (for example, stop operation sequences shown in FIGS. 11 to 15 to be described later), and the rotation is performed according to the selected stop operation process. A game machine, wherein the decoration member is stopped at the basic position .

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when a predetermined effect stop operation is performed during a predetermined effect by the rotating decorative member, a specific stop operation is performed based on the rotation state of the rotating decorative member at that time. A process is selected, and the rotating decorative member is stopped at a predetermined rotational position according to the selected stop operation process. Therefore, according to the present invention, it is possible to efficiently stop the rotation operation of the rotary decorative member, and it is possible to reduce the load on the rotation shaft portion and the drive portion of the rotary decorative member.

It is a figure for demonstrating the function flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit with which the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic structure top view of the rotation decoration part of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic block diagram of the rotation position detection mechanism provided in the rotation decoration part in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement sequence (the 1) at the time of presentation operation | movement of the rotation decoration part in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement sequence (the 2) at the time of presentation operation | movement of the rotation decoration part in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement sequence (the 3) at the time of presentation operation | movement of the rotation decoration part in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the stop operation | movement sequence (the 1) at the time of the production stop of the rotation decoration part in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the stop operation | movement sequence (the 2) at the time of the presentation stop of the rotation decoration part in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the stop operation | movement sequence (the 3) at the time of the presentation stop of the rotation decoration part in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the stop operation | movement sequence (the 4) at the time of the presentation stop of the rotation decoration part in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the stop operation | movement sequence (the 5) at the time of the presentation stop of the rotation decoration part in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 3 is a schematic configuration plan view of the movable decorative portion of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention (when not performing). It is a schematic structure top view (at the time of production) of the movable decoration part of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement sequence (the 1) of the movable decoration part in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement sequence (the 2) of the movable decoration part in one Embodiment of this invention. It is an external appearance top view of the decoration frame vicinity of the front door at the time of the non-production of the movable decoration part in one Embodiment of this invention. It is an external appearance top view near the decoration frame of the front door at the time of production of the movable decoration part in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | positioning table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table at the time of the bonus action | operation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for general game states (RT0) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT4 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT5 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RB (regular bonus) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for bonuses in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 2) for a small combination and replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 4) for a small combination and replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for spinning cylinder stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 1st stop at the time of forward pressing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of a forward press in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example (The example in case the table number for 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of a forward press is "09") at the time of a forward press in 2nd embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example (The example in case the table number for 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of a forward press is "10") at the time of a forward press in 2nd embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example (The example in case the table number for 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of forward pressing is 18) at the time of forward pressing in 2nd embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example (example in case an irregular pressing time table selection data is "03") in the irregular pressing time stop table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order table selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table in one Embodiment of this invention. 5 is a correspondence table between an internal winning combination and a reel stop order in an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the flag conversion table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery table for continuous lock states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel production pattern table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel production data selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel production | presentation code determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel production | presentation code table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the excitation data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the reel production | generation pattern in one Embodiment of this invention, and the time concerning acceleration processing. It is a schematic structure schematic diagram of the map used in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the sub management game state controlled by the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub management state transfer lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub management state transfer lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub management state transfer lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub management state transfer lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map winning lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map winning lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map winning lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map game number lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map game number subtraction lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a correspondence table of the number of map games and a subtraction value in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lock and accessory classification lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lock and accessory classification lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lock and accessory classification lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lock and accessory classification lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lock and accessory classification lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lock and accessory classification lottery table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lock and accessory classification lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order data storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the point bonus lottery table during pseudo | simulation bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus bonus addition lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table at the time of the end of a pseudo | simulation bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition flag lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of RT game state (main game state) controlled by the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state (sub game state) controlled by the sub control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is the transition flow figure which combined the transition flow of the main game state of the gaming machine in one embodiment of this invention, and the transition flow of the sub game state. It is a main flowchart which shows the process example of the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery value change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production flag selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game start time effect control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect lottery process (the 1) in the continuous lock state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect lottery process (the 2) in the continuous lock state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sub management state lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sub management state transfer lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the precursor classification lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the map winning lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the map game number lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock setting process after the 3rd stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock process at the time of the game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the attraction | saving priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the drawing priority order table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sliding piece number determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 2nd and 3rd stop process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line change bit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line mask data change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority drawing-in control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change process after the 2nd stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock process at the time of the game end in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process after a rotation stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the map setting process after a stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game end effect control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the continuous lock state transfer lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus completion | finish check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation | movement check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interruption process by control of main CPU (Central Processing Unit) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board | substrate communication task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production registration task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the start command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in normal state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in chance zone in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process of 7 equal pseudo | simulation bonuses in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the display command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the payout completion command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of bonus end command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the movable accessory effect process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the rotation accessory effect process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the rotation accessory effect stop process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process after a rotating cylinder stop in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the map setting process after a stop in a modification.

  Hereinafter, a pachi-slot showing an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, the winning probability of replay is displayed when an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) that is a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like and a specific symbol combination is displayed. A pachislot machine having a function of an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) that simultaneously operates with a function of operating a replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”), which is a gaming state that is higher than usual, will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of this embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to medals, for example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along a winning determination line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations are those related to “winning” that gives the player benefits such as medal payout, re-game operation, bonus game operation, etc., and other so-called “losing” And are provided.

  Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means and the special game stop control means, based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed, Control to stop rotation.

  In the pachi-slot, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”, and the maximum number is determined as four symbols.

  The reel stop control means, when an internal winning combination allowing the symbol combination display related to winning is determined, within a specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols), the symbol combination follows the winning determination line. Stop the reel rotation so that it is displayed as much as possible. Further, the reel stop control means uses the specified time to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the winning determination line.

  When the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped in this way, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line is related to winning. When the winning determination means determines that the symbol combination is related to winning, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player. In the pachislot, the above-described series of operations are performed as a single game (unit game).

  Also, in the pachislot, in the series of operations described above, various effects are displayed by using the video display performed by the liquid crystal display device, the light output performed by various lamps, the sound output performed by the speaker, or a combination thereof. Is done. Further, in the present embodiment, a reel effect (reel action) and a lock are also performed in a game state referred to as a “continuous lock state” (“chance zone”) described later. Here, “lock” is an operation of invalidating or delaying a game operation by a player for a specific period. In the present embodiment, the effect by the lock is also performed in a game state (ART non-operation state) referred to as a “normal state” described later.

  When the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter referred to as effect random number value) is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination. When the effect random number is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect content to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination.

  When the contents of the effect are determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity, such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when determining whether there is a winning. In this way, in the pachislot, the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed by the player) by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is provided to the player and the player's interest can be improved.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 is a perspective view showing an external structure of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a view showing an internal structure of the pachislot machine 1.

[Appearance structure]
As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot 1 includes an exterior body 2 (game machine housing). The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that accommodates a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be opened and closed. Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means) are provided, and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction (direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of the reels). Is done. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively.

  Each reel (display row) has a cylindrical reel body and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface (circumferential surface) of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are continuously drawn on the surface of the sheet material along the circumferential direction of the reel body.

  A liquid crystal display device 10 is provided in the center of the front door 2b. The liquid crystal display device 10 includes a display screen including a display window 4 for displaying symbols drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. In the present embodiment, the entire display screen including the display window 4 is used to display an image and execute an effect.

  The display window 4 is made of, for example, a transparent member such as an acrylic plate, and is provided at a position overlapping with the three reel arrangement areas when viewed from the front (player side) as shown in FIG. It is provided so as to be positioned in front of one reel (player side). Therefore, the symbols drawn on the three reels provided behind the display window 4 can be viewed through the display window 4.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display window 4 stops, the display window 4 displays three symbols arranged in succession among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel. Configured to be able to. That is, in the frame of the display window 4, an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are provided for each reel, and one symbol can be displayed in each area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, symbols are displayed in a 3 × 3 array form within the frame of the display window 4. In the present embodiment, a line (center line) connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R (the center line) is a line for determining whether or not a prize is awarded (hereinafter referred to as a winning line). Defined as a winning determination line or an active line).

  A 7-segment display 6 made up of 7-segment LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) is provided at the bottom of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 10. The 7-segment display 6 is stored in the interior of the pachislot machine 1, the number of medals inserted in the current game (hereinafter referred to as the inserted number), the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the paid-out number). Information such as the number of medals (hereinafter referred to as credits) is digitally displayed.

  The front door 2b is provided with various devices (medal insertion slot 11, MAX bet button 12, 1BET button 14, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R) to be operated by the player.

  The medal slot 11 is provided to accept a medal that is inserted into the pachislot 1 from the outside by the player. The medals accepted through the medal slot 11 are inserted into one game up to a predetermined number (for example, three), and the amount exceeding the predetermined number can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (so-called Credit function). In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, the number of medals that can be inserted into one game is either two or three (see FIG. 29).

  The MAX bet button 12 and the 1BET button 14 are provided to determine the number of coins put in one game from medals deposited inside the pachislot 1. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the front door 2b is provided with a settlement button (disposed on the side of the start lever 16 opposite to the stop button). This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) medals deposited inside the pachi-slot 1 to the outside.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the front door 2b is provided with a medal payout port 18, a medal tray 19, a lamp 20, speakers 21L and 21R (audio output unit), and the like.

  The medal payout port 18 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 33 described later to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 18. The lamp 20 is configured by an LED or the like, and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the effect content. In addition, the speakers 21L and 21R output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the production contents.

  A decorative frame 30 having an opening 30a for exposing the display unit of the liquid crystal display device 10 is provided on the front surface (player side) of the upper portion of the front door 2b. The decorative frame 30 is provided with a lamp 20 and a rotating decorative portion 22.

  The lamp 20 is composed of an LED or the like, and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the effect content. The rotation decoration unit 22 is disposed at the approximate center of the upper part of the decoration frame 30 and performs a rotation operation and / or a light emission operation when a predetermined effect is performed.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the decorative frame 30 is provided with a movable decorative portion 23 (see FIGS. 5 and 16 described later). The movable decoration part 23 mainly performs a mechanical effect by a pair of movable units described later. Specifically, the pair of movable units is arranged on the back side (the liquid crystal display device 10 side) of the upper part of the decorative frame 30 when not performing, so that the player cannot see it hidden behind the decorative frame 30. Although arranged (see FIG. 20 described later), at the time of production, the pair of movable units rotate and are exposed to the opening 30a of the decorative frame 30 (see FIG. 21 described later).

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 2b is opened, and shows a structure on the back side of the front door 2b and a structure inside the cabinet 2a.

  A main board 31 constituting a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is provided in the upper part of the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit that controls the main operation of the game in the pachislot machine 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, determination of the presence / absence of a prize, and the like. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described later.

  Three reels (a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R) are provided in the central portion of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor described later (any of stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R in FIG. 4) via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. .

  A medal payout device 33 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper 33) having a structure capable of accommodating a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one is provided in a lower portion in the cabinet 2a. In addition, a power supply device 34 that supplies necessary power to each device of the pachislot 1 is provided on one side of the hopper 33 (on the left side in the example shown in FIG. 3) in the cabinet 2a.

  On the back side of the front door 2b (the part on the opposite side of the display screen), a sub-board constituting a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 4 and 5), which will be described later, is located above the area where the display window 4 is arranged. 32 is provided. The sub-control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls the execution of effects by displaying images. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 42 will be described later.

  Furthermore, a selector 35 is provided in the lower part of the arrangement area of the display window 4 on the back side of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device for selecting whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 11 is appropriate, and guides the medal determined to be appropriate to the hopper 33. Although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor 35 </ b> S (see FIG. 4 described later) is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 35.

<Configuration of circuits provided in pachislot>
Next, with reference to FIG.4 and FIG.5, the structure of the circuit with which the pachislot 1 in this embodiment is provided is demonstrated. 4 is a block configuration diagram of the entire circuit included in the pachislot machine 1, and FIG. 5 is a block configuration diagram illustrating an internal configuration of the sub control circuit.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the pachi-slot 1 includes a main control circuit 41, a sub-control circuit 42, and peripheral devices (actuators) electrically connected to these circuits.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 41 is mainly configured by a microcomputer 50 installed on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes, as shown in FIG. , And a payout completion signal circuit 66.

  The microcomputer 50 includes a main CPU 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

  The main ROM 52 includes control programs for various processes (see FIGS. 100 to 135 to be described later) executed by the main CPU 51, data tables (see FIGS. 22 to 83 to be described later) such as an internal lottery table, and sub-control circuits 42. On the other hand, data and the like for transmitting various control commands (commands) are stored. The main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area (see FIGS. 84 to 89 to be described later) for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56 and a sampling circuit 57 are connected to the main CPU 51. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 51 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 56 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  Various switches and sensors are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R.

  The stop switch 17S (stop operation detecting means) detects that the player has pressed each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R (stop operation). The start switch 16S (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The settlement switch 14S detects that the settlement button has been pressed by the player.

  The medal sensor 35S (insertion operation detecting means) detects that a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 11 has passed through the selector 35. The bet switch 12S detects that the player has pressed the bet button (the MAX bet button 12 or the 1BET button 14).

  Peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 50 include three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R (variation display means), a 7-segment display 6, and a hopper 33. A drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

  The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects, for each reel, a reel index indicating that the reel has made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

  Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R has a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of output pulses, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a constant angle.

  The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor, thereby determining the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, how many reels the number of symbols is). Only managed).

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the value of the symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is set to “1”. "Is added. A symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 63.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of sliding symbols in the game is set to 4 symbols. Therefore, for example, when a stop button corresponding to a predetermined reel is pressed during a game, the predetermined reel design located in the corresponding area on the winning determination line in the display window 4 and up to four ahead A symbol existing in the range is a symbol that can be stopped in the region.

  A display unit drive circuit 64 included in the main control circuit 41 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. The payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not medals discharged from the hopper 33 have reached a predetermined payout number. To do.

[Sub control circuit]
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the sub control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. . As shown in FIG. 5, the sub control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, a driver 86, a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, A A / D (Analog to Digital) converter 92, an amplifier 93, a rotation decoration part drive circuit 94 (rotation decoration part drive part), and a movable decoration part drive circuit 95 (movable decoration part drive part).

  The sub CPU 81 performs video, sound, and light output control according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. The control program stored in the program storage area includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, a production random number value, and determination of production contents (production data). An effect registration task for performing registration, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 10 based on the determined contents of the effect, a lamp control task for controlling light output from the lamp 20, and a speaker 21L , 21R includes a program such as a voice control task for controlling sound output.

  In the data storage area, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting various effects, a storage area for storing animation data relating to creation of video, and sound data relating to BGM and sound effects And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern.

  The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, peripheral devices such as the liquid crystal display device 10, the speakers 21 </ b> L and 21 </ b> R, the lamp 20, the rotary decoration unit 22, and the movable decoration unit 23 are connected to the sub control circuit 42. The operation of the peripheral device is controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create a video according to the animation data designated by the contents of the presentation, and the created video is generated by the liquid crystal display device 10. Is displayed.

  The sub CPU 81, DSP 90, audio RAM 91, A / D converter 92, and amplifier 93 output sound such as BGM from the speakers 21L and 21R according to the sound data specified by the contents of the presentation. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp 20 in accordance with the lamp data specified by the contents of the effect.

  The rotation decoration part drive circuit 94 drives the rotation decoration part 22 in accordance with the accessory driving data designated by the contents of the effect. For example, in the present embodiment, when a lottery effect of the rotation decoration unit 22 performed at the start operation is won, the rotation decoration unit drive circuit 94 drives the rotation decoration unit 22 to perform a predetermined rotation effect and / or light emission effect. Do.

  In addition, the rotation decoration part 22 has the rotation member 25, the rotation position detection mechanism 26, and the detection element 27, as shown in FIG. Moreover, although not shown in FIG. 5, the rotation decoration part 22 has a light emitting element which consists of LED etc., for example. The rotating member 25 is a member that is rotationally driven at the time of presentation by the rotary decoration unit 22. The rotation position detection mechanism 26 detects the rotation position of the rotation member 25. The detection element 27 detects whether or not the rotational position of the rotating member 25 has reached a predetermined position (a basic position described later). The configuration and operation of the rotary decoration unit 22 will be described in detail later.

  The movable decoration part drive circuit 95 drives the movable decoration part 23 according to the accessory driving data specified by the contents of the effect. For example, in this embodiment, as will be described later, in a gaming state in which the AT does not operate, a lock / actual effect is performed based on information called a “map”. The movable decoration unit 23 is driven at the same timing as the lock generation timing (generation game) controlled by the control circuit 41 to perform a specific effect.

  In addition, the movable decoration part 23 has the movable unit part 23a, the light emitting element 23b, and the detection element 74, as shown in FIG. The movable unit 23a includes a pair of movable units (a first movable unit 71 and a second movable unit 72: see FIG. 16), which will be described later, which perform a mechanical performance operation. The light emitting element 23b is composed of, for example, an LED and emits a part of each movable unit. The detection element 74 detects whether or not the pair of movable units are driven (whether or not the pair of movable units are stored behind the decorative frame 30). The configuration and operation of the movable decorative portion 23 will be described later in detail.

  A decorative part that performs, for example, a mechanical operation, a light emitting operation, or both of the operations, such as the rotary decoration unit 22 and the movable decoration unit 23 described above, is generally referred to as an “act”. Therefore, in the following, the rotating decoration portion 22 is referred to as “rotating accessory 22”, and the movable decoration portion 23 is referred to as “movable accessory 23”. Moreover, in this embodiment, the light emitting element 23b which consists of LED provided in the movable accessory 23 is also called "essential LED23b."

[Rotating accessory (Rotating decoration)]
Here, the configuration of the rotating accessory 22 and its production operation will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(1) Configuration of Rotating Tool First, a configuration example of the rotating tool 22 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an enlarged front view of the rotating combination 22 when the case cover (not shown) of the rotating combination 22 is removed.

  The rotary member 22 has a rotary member 25 (rotary decorative member) having a circular surface shape and a predetermined pattern drawn on the surface, and a rotary mechanism (not shown) including a motor for driving the rotary member 25 to rotate. Is provided. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the rotation mechanism including the motor is disposed on the back surface side (the liquid crystal display device 10 side) of the rotation member 25. The rotating tool 22 is driven to rotate clockwise (in the direction of arrow A1 in FIG. 6; hereinafter referred to as the forward direction) or counterclockwise (in the direction of arrow A2 in FIG. 6; hereinafter referred to as the reverse direction) by the rotating mechanism. The

  The rotating combination 22 includes a rotation position detection mechanism 26 (rotation position detection mechanism) for detecting its own rotation position (rotation angle from the basic position). FIG. 7 shows a schematic configuration of the rotational position detection mechanism 26. The rotational position detection mechanism 26 is also provided on the back side (the liquid crystal display device 10 side) of the rotating member 25.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the rotational position detection mechanism 26 has a defined region portion 26 a of a rotational position extending in a rectangular shape, and a groove 26 b (hereinafter referred to as a light passage) through which light passes in a part of the defined region portion 26 a. , The rotation position detection unit 26b). In FIG. 7, the upper long side portion of the defining region portion 26a is located on the upper side of the front door 2b, and the lower long side portion of the defining region portion 26a is located on the lower side of the front door 2b. Shall.

  This rotational position detection mechanism 26 rotates together with the rotation of the rotary member 22. Specifically, when the rotating combination 22 rotates, the rotational position detection mechanism 26 rotates along the extending direction of the rotational position defining region portion 26a. That is, when the rotating combination 22 rotates, the rotation position detection unit 26b moves along the extending direction of the specified region portion 26a. In the present embodiment, the position of the rotation position detection unit 26b is detected along the extending direction of the specified region portion 26a, and the rotation position of the rotating accessory 22 is specified.

  In the present embodiment, the resolution of the rotational position is 360 degrees / 240 divisions, and the rotational position of the rotating accessory 22 is defined at intervals of 1.5 degrees (one step). Then, the coordinates of the rotation position (step positions “0” to “240”) are defined around the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 7) along the extending direction of the defined area portion 26a.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the extending length of the rotational position detector 26b is 14 steps. In this embodiment, the state (the state shown in FIG. 7) when the rotational position detection unit 26 b is located at the center of the long side portion below the defined region portion 26 a is the basic state of the rotating accessory 22.

  Further, the position of the right end portion of the rotational position detection unit 26b when the rotating accessory 22 is in the basic state is defined as a step position “0” (= “240”). Therefore, when the rotating combination 22 is in the basic state, the central position of the rotational position detector 26b is the step position “7”, and the position of the left end of the rotational position detector 26b is the step position “14”. .

  Furthermore, here, the central position of the rotational position detector 26b is defined as the rotational position (step position) of the rotating accessory 22. Therefore, for example, when the rotating combination 22 is in the basic state, the rotation position of the rotating combination 22 (hereinafter referred to as the basic position) is the step position “7”.

  Although not shown in FIG. 7, at the step position “0”, whether or not the rotational position detection unit 26b has passed the step position “0” (the rotational position of the rotating accessory 22 has reached the step position “0”). A sensing element 27 is provided for detecting whether or not. In addition, the detection element 27 is comprised with a photo sensor etc., for example. In this embodiment, an example in which one detection element 27 is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of detection elements 27 may be provided.

  Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrated the example which comprises the rotation position detection part 26b of the rotation accessory 22 with a groove | channel, this invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotational position detection unit 26b may be configured with a detection piece. In this case, for example, it is preferable to provide a detection element 27 of the detection piece at each of the step positions “0” and “14”. Thus, by providing a plurality of detection elements 27 and detecting the passage of the detection piece by each detection element 27, not only the rotation position of the rotating accessory 22 but also the rotation direction can be detected.

(2) Illustrative operation example of rotating combination Next, an exemplary operational operation of the rotating combination 22 performed in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, when the effect lottery of the rotating combination 22 performed at the start operation of the game (when the start lever 16 is pressed) is won, the rotating combination 22 is executed until the third stop of the reel is executed. An effect (hereinafter referred to as a left-right sway effect) that sequentially repeats the operation of rotating the predetermined angle by a predetermined angle (forward rotation) and the operation of rotating the rotating accessory 22 by the predetermined angle in the reverse direction (reverse rotation) is performed. . In the present embodiment, the left / right swing effect of the rotating accessory 22 is implemented regardless of the gaming state.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 8-10, the operation | movement sequence of the right-and-left swing effect of the rotation accessory 22 is demonstrated. In the present embodiment, three types of left and right shaking effects are prepared in which the rotation frequency of the rotating combination 22 is “large”, “medium”, or “small”. FIG. It is an operation sequence of a left-right swing effect when “small”. Further, FIG. 9 is an operation sequence of a left / right swing effect when the swing frequency of the rotating combination 22 is “medium”, and FIG. 10 is a left / right shift sequence when the swing frequency of the rotating combination 22 is “high”. It is an operation sequence of shaking production.

  In the operation sequence when the shaking frequency shown in FIG. 8 is “low”, the rendering operation is started from the state where the rotating combination 22 stops at the basic position (the “stop” state in the order “1” in FIG. 8). The In this state, first, the rotating accessory 22 is rotated in the reverse direction by 15 steps (22.5 degrees) from the basic position (step position “7”) (“acceleration” operation in order “2”). Next, the rotating combination 22 is stopped, and then the motor is excited to switch the rotation direction of the rotating combination 22 from the reverse direction to the forward direction (operation “stop (with excitation)” in order “3”). The period of the stop excitation operation in this order “3” is 100 msec. Thereafter, the rotating accessory 22 is rotated in the forward direction by 30 steps (45 degrees) from the stop position (step position “232”) (“acceleration” operation in order “4”).

  Next, the rotating combination 22 is stopped, and then the motor is excited to switch the rotation direction of the rotating combination 22 from the forward direction to the reverse direction (“stop (with excitation)” operation in order “5”). The period of the stop excitation operation in this order “5” is 100 msec. Thereafter, the rotating combination 22 is rotated in the reverse direction by 30 steps from the stop position (step position “22”) (“acceleration” operation in order “6”).

  Subsequently, the rotating combination 22 is stopped, and then the motor is excited to switch the rotation direction of the rotating combination 22 from the reverse direction to the forward direction (“stop (with excitation)” operation in order “7”). The period of the stop excitation operation in this order “7” is 100 msec. Thereafter, the rotating accessory 22 is rotated in the forward direction by 15 steps from the stop position (step position “232”) (“acceleration” operation in order “8”). As a result, the rotating combination 22 moves to the basic position (step position “7”).

  Subsequently, the rotating combination 22 is stopped at the basic position, and then the motor is excited to switch the rotation direction of the rotating combination 22 to the reverse direction ("stop (with excitation)" operation in order "9"). The period of the stop excitation operation in this order “9” is 3000 msec. Thereafter, the operations in the order “2” to “9” are repeated until the reel is stopped for the third time. The operation sequence of the left / right shaking effect of the rotating accessory 22 when the shaking frequency shown in FIG. 8 is “small” is performed in this way.

  Next, an operation sequence (FIGS. 9 and 10) of a left / right swing effect when the swing frequency of the rotating accessory 22 is “medium” or “large” will be described. As is clear from a comparison between FIG. 8 and FIGS. 9 and 10, the operation sequence of the left / right swing effect of the rotating accessory 22 when the swing frequency is “medium” or “large” ”Is an operation sequence in which the period of the stop excitation operation of the order“ 9 ”is changed in the operation sequence of the left / right swing effect of the rotating accessory 22.

  Specifically, in the operation sequence when the oscillation frequency shown in FIG. 9 is “medium”, the period of the stop excitation operation in the order “9” is 1500 msec, and the oscillation frequency shown in FIG. 10 is “high”. In the operation sequence, the period of the stop excitation operation of the order “9” is 100 msec. That is, the stop time of the rotating accessory 22 in the order “9” is shortened in the order of the operation sequences of FIGS. As a result, the repetition frequency (swing frequency) of the operations in the order “2” to “9” described above increases in the order of the operation sequences of FIGS. 8, 9, and 10.

(3) Stopping operation of rotating combination In the present embodiment, when the reel is stopped for the third time in the middle of the left-right swing effect of the rotating combination 22 described above, an interruption process for stopping the rotating combination 22 is performed. Then, the effect by the rotating accessory 22 is ended (stopped). At this time, in the present embodiment, an optimal stop operation of the rotating combination 22 is appropriately performed according to the rotation state (rotational position and rotation direction) of the rotating combination 22 at the time of the third stop of the reel.

  In the present embodiment, as described in the operation sequence of FIGS. 8 to 10 described above, the left / right shaking effect by the rotating combination 22 is started from a state in which the rotating combination 22 is stopped at the basic position. By setting such an effect start condition, the rotation position at the start of the effect by the rotating combination 22 becomes constant, so that the effect by the rotating combination 22 can always be started at an appropriate timing (same timing). Therefore, in the stop processing of the rotating combination 22 of this embodiment, the rotating combination is stopped at the basic position (step position “7”). However, in the present embodiment, in any of the various stop operation sequences to be described later, it is finally assumed that the rotating accessory 22 is stopped at the basic position by forward rotation.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 11 to FIG. 15, a stop operation sequence that is performed when the rotation of the rotating accessory 22 is stopped is described.

  FIG. 11 shows that the rotating combination 22 is rotating forward at the third stop of the reel, and the rotation position of the rotating combination 22 (the central position of the rotation position detecting unit 26b) is the step position “128” or more. This is a stop operation sequence in the case (rotation state 1). In this rotation state 1, first, the rotating combination 22 is stopped at the time of the third stop of the reel (“stop” operation in order “1” in FIG. 11).

  Next, until the rotation position detection unit 26b of the rotating combination 22 is detected by the detection element 27 (photo sensor) arranged at the step position “0” (the rotation position of the rotating combination 22 reaches the step position “0”). The rotating combination 22 is rotated in the forward direction ("acceleration" operation in the order "2"). Thereafter, the rotating combination 22 is rotated in the forward direction while decelerating from the detection position (step position “0”) of the detection element 27 by 7 steps, and the rotating combination 22 is stopped at the basic position (sequence “3”). "Deceleration" operation). In the rotation state 1, the rotating accessory 22 is stopped in this way.

  FIG. 12 shows a stop operation sequence in the case where the rotating combination 22 is rotating in the reverse direction and the rotation position of the rotating combination 22 is equal to or greater than the step position “128” at the third stop of the reel (rotation state 2). It is. In the rotation state 2, first, the rotating combination 22 is stopped when the reels are stopped for the third time ("stop" operation in the order "1" in FIG. 12).

  Next, the motor is excited to switch the rotation direction of the rotating accessory 22 from the reverse direction to the forward direction (“stop (with excitation)” operation in order “2”). The period of the stop excitation operation in the order “2” is 100 msec. Thereafter, in the operations of the order “3” and “4”, the rotating accessory 22 is stopped at the basic position in the same manner as the order “2” and “3” of the stop operation sequence in the rotation state 1 described in FIG. . In the rotation state 2, the rotating accessory 22 is stopped in this way.

  FIG. 13 shows the case where the rotating combination 22 is stopped (excited) and the rotation position of the rotating combination 22 is equal to or greater than the step position “128” at the third stop of the reel (rotation state 3). This is a stop operation sequence. In this rotation state 3, first, the rotating accessory 22 is stopped at the time of the third stop of the reel ("stop" operation in the order "1" in FIG. 13).

  Next, the motor is excited to set the rotation direction of the rotating accessory 22 to the forward direction ("stop (with excitation)" operation in order "2"). The stop excitation operation in the order “2” is performed from the start of the stop excitation operation in the order “2” to 100 msec. Thereafter, in the operations of the order “3” and “4”, the rotating accessory 22 is stopped at the basic position in the same manner as the order “2” and “3” of the stop operation sequence in the rotation state 1 described in FIG. . In the rotation state 3, the rotating combination 22 is stopped in this way.

  FIG. 14 shows a stop operation sequence in the case where the rotating combination 22 is rotating in the reverse direction and the rotation position of the rotating combination 22 is equal to or less than the step position “127” at the third stop of the reel (rotation state 4) It is. In this rotation state 4, first, at the third stop of the reel, the rotating accessory 22 is stopped ("stop" operation in order "1" in FIG. 14).

  Next, until the rotational position detector 26b of the rotational combination 22 is detected by the detection element 27 (until the rotational position of the rotational combination 22 reaches the step position “0”), the rotational combination 22 is reversely rotated (in order). "2" "acceleration" operation). Thereafter, the rotating combination 22 is rotated in the reverse direction while decelerating by 10 steps from the detection position (step position “0”) of the detecting element 27 to stop the rotating combination 22 (“3” in order “3”). "Deceleration" operation).

  Next, in a state where the rotating combination 22 is stopped, the motor is excited to switch the rotation direction of the rotating combination 22 from the reverse direction to the forward direction (operation “stop (with excitation)” in order “4”). The stop excitation operation in the order “4” is performed from the start of the stop excitation operation in the order “4” to 100 msec. Thereafter, in the operations of the order “5” and “6”, the rotating accessory 22 is stopped at the basic position in the same manner as the order “2” and “3” of the stop operation sequence in the rotation state 1 described in FIG. . In the rotation state 4, the rotating combination 22 is stopped in this way.

  Further, FIG. 15 shows a stop when the rotating combination 22 is rotating forward and the rotation position of the rotating combination 22 is equal to or less than the step position “127” at the third stop of the reel (rotation state 5). It is an operation sequence. In this rotation state 5, first, the rotating combination 22 is stopped at the time of the third stop of the reel ("stop" operation in the order "1" in FIG. 14).

  Next, in a state where the rotating combination 22 is stopped, the motor is excited to switch the rotation direction of the rotating combination 22 from the forward direction to the reverse direction (operation “stop (with excitation)” in order “2”). The stop excitation operation in the order “2” is performed from the start of stop excitation in the order “2” to 100 msec.

  Next, until the rotational position detector 26b of the rotational combination 22 is detected by the detection element 27 (until the rotational position of the rotational combination 22 reaches the step position “0”), the rotational combination 22 is reversely rotated (in order). “3” “acceleration” operation). Thereafter, the rotating combination 22 is rotated in the reverse direction while decelerating by 10 steps from the detection position (step position “0”) of the detecting element 27 to stop the rotating combination 22 (“4” in order “4”). "Deceleration" operation).

  Next, in a state where the rotating combination 22 is stopped, the motor is excited to switch the rotation direction of the rotating combination 22 from the reverse direction to the forward direction ("stop (with excitation)" operation in order "5"). The stop excitation operation in the order “5” is performed from the start of the stop excitation operation in the order “5” to 100 msec. Thereafter, in the operations of the order “6” and “7”, the rotating accessory 22 is stopped at the basic position in the same manner as the order “2” and “3” of the stop operation sequence in the rotation state 1 described in FIG. . In the rotation state 5, the rotating accessory 22 is stopped in this way.

  As described above, in the effect stop operation of the rotating combination 22 according to the present embodiment, the rotating combination 22 is appropriately stopped according to the optimal stop operation sequence according to the rotation state of the rotating combination 22 at the third stop of the reel. Can be made. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the rotating combination 22 can be efficiently stopped at the basic position, so that the load on the rotating shaft portion and the driving unit of the rotating combination 22 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the left-right swing effect of the rotating combination 22, an example in which the rotating combination 22 is rotated and moved by 15 steps (swing width) in the left-right direction (forward direction and reverse direction) from the basic position. Although described, the present invention is not limited to this. The swing width of the rotating accessory 22 can be arbitrarily set according to, for example, the model, the type of effect, and the like.

[Movable accessory (movable decorative part)]
Next, the configuration of the movable accessory 23 and its production operation will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(1) Configuration of movable accessory First, one configuration example of the movable accessory 23 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG. 16 is a schematic configuration plan view of the movable accessory 23 when the movable accessory 23 is housed on the back side of the decorative frame 30 at the time of non-production, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic configuration plan view of a movable accessory 23 when exposed to the front surface of the display device 10. 16 and 17 are both schematic plan views of the movable accessory 23 when the movable accessory 23 is viewed from the liquid crystal display device 10 side. 16 and 17 show a state in which the inner drive mechanism is exposed by removing the back cover (not shown) of the movable accessory 23 in order to clarify the configuration of the movable accessory 23.

  The movable accessory 23 includes a base part 70, a first movable unit 71 and a second movable unit 72 (movable decorative member) attached to the base part 70, a drive mechanism 73 and a detection element 74 housed in the base part 70. With.

  The drive mechanism 73 is composed of various drive components for driving the first movable unit 71 and the second movable unit 72. For example, the drive mechanism 73 includes a first gear piece 73a and a second gear piece 73b to which the first movable unit 71 and the second movable unit 72 are attached, a motor 73c, a first gear piece 73a, and a motor 73c. And a slider member 73d connected to the.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, since the first gear piece 73a and the second gear piece 73b have a structure that meshes with each other, the motor 73c is driven to drive the slider 73d through the slider member 73d. The first gear piece 73a and the second gear piece 73b rotate together. That is, in the present embodiment, the first movable unit 71 and the second movable unit 72 are rotated together by driving the motor 73c.

  The first movable unit 71 and the second movable unit 72 are a pair of movable units and have the same configuration. Each movable unit is a substantially plate-like member extending in one direction, and one end portion has a shape extending in a substantially arc shape (hereinafter, this portion is referred to as an arc-shaped portion). The other end of each movable unit is fixed to the rotation shaft of the corresponding gear piece. In the present embodiment, the first movable unit 71 and the second movable unit 72 are driven at the time of production, and the first movable unit 71 and the second movable unit 72 are brought into contact with each other on the ends of the arcuate portions (state of FIG. 17). The first movable unit 71 and the second movable unit 72 are attached to the drive mechanism 73 so that the inner periphery of the arc-shaped portion of the unit 71 faces the inner periphery of the arc-shaped portion of the second movable unit 72.

  At the time of production by the movable accessory 23 having the above configuration, each movable unit is rotated around the rotation axis of the corresponding gear piece so as to be exposed on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 10 (arrows R1 and R2 in FIG. 16). reference). On the other hand, at the end of the production of the movable accessory 23 (during storage), each movable unit is rotated in the opposite direction to that at the production (see arrows R3 and R4 in FIG. 17), and the movable accessory 23 is decorated. It is stored on the back side of the frame 30.

  The detection element 74 is composed of, for example, a photosensor, and is a sensor for detecting the drive (storage) of a pair of movable units of the movable accessory 23. In the present embodiment, based on the detection result of the detection element 74, whether or not a specific effect by the movable accessory 23 is started, or the specific effect by the movable accessory 23 ends and the movable accessory 23 is decorated. It is determined whether or not it is stored on the back side (liquid crystal display device 10 side) of the frame 30 (see the flowchart of the movable accessory effect processing in FIG. 147 described later). The detection element 74 is not limited to a photosensor, and any detection device can be used as long as it is a detection device that can detect the operation of the movable accessory 23.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, the second gear piece 73 b is attached with a light shielding piece 73 e, and the first movable unit 71 and the second movable unit 72 are stored behind the decorative frame 30. If it is, the light shielding piece 73e is arranged at a position overlapping the detection unit 74a of the detection element 74. However, at the time of production, as shown in FIG. 17, the first movable unit 71 and the second movable unit 72 are driven (turned), whereby the position of the light shielding piece 73e also changes, and the light shielding piece 73e is detected by the detection element 74. It moves to the position where it does not overlap with the detection unit 74a. Therefore, in the present embodiment, while the light shielding piece 73e of the second gear piece 73b is detected by the detection unit 74a of the detection element 74, the pair of movable units of the movable accessory 23 is not driven (a pair of pairs). If the light shielding piece 73e of the second gear piece 73b is not detected, it is determined that the pair of movable units are being driven (a specific effect has been started). To do.

  In this embodiment, although not shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the movable accessory 23 (each movable unit) plays a role for causing a part of the movable units (mainly arc-shaped portions) to emit light. An object LED 23b (see FIG. 5) is provided. Switching of turning on and off of the accessory LED 23b is controlled based on the detection result of the detection element 74 described above.

  Specifically, when driving of the pair of movable units (production start) is detected by the detection element 74, the accessory LED 23 b is turned on, and a predetermined presentation by the accessory LED 23 b is started. When the storage of the pair of movable units (production end) is detected, the accessory LED 23b is turned off. That is, in this embodiment, based on the detection result of the detection element 74, the effect by the accessory LED 23b operates in conjunction with the mechanical effect by the pair of movable units. In the present embodiment, in this linked production operation, predetermined sound (sound) output is also performed by the speakers 21L and 21R together with the production by the accessory LED 23b.

(2) Illustrative operation example of movable accessory Next, with reference to FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, an exemplary operation operation of the movable accessory 23 performed in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 is a first effect operation sequence of the movable accessory 23, and FIG. 19 is a second effect operation sequence of the movable accessory 23.

  In the present embodiment, the motor 73c is driven (excited) at a rotation angle of 1.25 degrees (one step) to rotate each movable unit of the movable accessory 23. Further, the effect by the movable accessory 23 described below is performed when a predetermined lock / actual effect is won by a map lottery described later.

  In the first effect operation sequence of the movable accessory 23 shown in FIG. 18, first, the pair of movable units (the first movable unit 71 and the second movable unit 72) of the movable accessory 23 are stored on the back side of the decorative frame 30. The production is started from the state of being stopped (the “stop” state of the order “1” in FIG. 18). Next, each movable unit is moved by 8 steps under the first acceleration condition in a direction in which each movable unit is exposed on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 10 (directions of arrows R1 and R2 in FIG. It rotates ("Acceleration 1" operation in order "1").

  Next, each movable unit is rotated in the exposure direction under the second acceleration condition until the detection element 74 (photo sensor) detects the driving of the movable accessory 23 ("acceleration 2" operation in order "3") ). Then, after the driving of the movable accessory 23 is detected by the detection element 74, each movable unit is further rotated in the exposure direction by 81 steps under the third acceleration condition ("acceleration 3" in order "4"). "Operation).

  Next, the movable accessory 23 is rotated in the exposure direction while decelerating by 30 steps, and each movable unit is stopped ("deceleration" operation in order "5"). In the present embodiment, a state where the ends of the first movable unit 71 and the second movable unit 72 on the arcuate portion side are brought into contact with each other by the operation of the order “5” (the state shown in FIG. 17).

  Then, after the movable accessory 23 is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 17, the motor 73c is excited to reverse its rotation direction (rotation direction of each movable unit) ("stop (with excitation)" in order "6") "Operation). The period of the stop excitation operation in this order “6” is 3500 msec.

  Next, after the stop excitation operation of the order “6” is completed, each movable unit is moved in the direction in which the pair of movable units are housed on the back side of the decorative frame 30 (the directions of arrows R3 and R4 in FIG. 17, hereinafter referred to as the housing direction). Is rotated under the fourth acceleration condition ("acceleration 4" operation in order "7"). The rotation operation of the order “7” is performed until the light shielding piece 73e of the second gear piece 73b is detected by the detection element 74 (photo sensor) (until the housing of the pair of movable units is detected). .

  After that, while decelerating each movable unit, it is rotated in the storing direction by 35 steps to stop each movable unit ("Deceleration" operation in order "8": state shown in FIG. 16). In the first effect operation sequence of the movable accessory 23, each movable unit of the movable accessory 23 is controlled to rotate as described above. Note that the first acceleration condition to the fourth acceleration condition described above may be different acceleration conditions or the same acceleration conditions.

  Next, the second effect operation sequence of the movable accessory 23 shown in FIG. 19 will be described. As is clear from the comparison between FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the operations in the order “1” to “8” of the second effect operation sequence are the same as the corresponding operations in the first effect operation sequence. However, in the second effect operation sequence of the movable accessory 23, after the operation of the order "6", the state after the operation of the order "6" (the movable accessory shown in FIG. 17) is provided unless a storage start trigger signal is input. 23 state).

  Here, an external plan view of the vicinity of the decorative frame 30 of the front door 2b at the time of non-production and production by the movable accessory 23 is shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, respectively. When the effect by the movable accessory 23 is not performed, as shown in FIG. 20, the pair of movable units of the movable accessory 23 is housed on the back side (the liquid crystal display device 10 side) of the decorative frame 30, so that the liquid crystal display It does not appear on the front of the device 10.

  On the other hand, when the effect by the movable accessory 23 is performed, the first movable unit 71 and the second movable unit 72 are driven, and the pair of movable units of the movable accessory 23 is the liquid crystal display device 10 as shown in FIG. Appears in front. At this time, in this embodiment, the lighting operation of the accessory LED 23b, the sound output operation by the speakers 21L and 21R, and the reel lock based on the map are interlocked with the mechanical performance operation by the pair of movable units. The performance is performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the movable accessory 23 is separately provided with a detection element 74 (photosensor) that detects the drive of the pair of movable units, and a pair of movable elements is detected based on the detection result of the detection element 74. The mechanical production by the unit and the production by the lighting operation of the accessory LED 23b and the sound output operation are performed in conjunction with each other. In this case, the plurality of decorative members can be operated in a more reliable manner regardless of the influence of aging of the movable accessory 23 or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, since it is not necessary to perform the adjustment processing for extending or shortening the production time described in the above prior art in such linked production operation, the processing load of the sub control circuit 42 is reduced. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, when a predetermined lock / combination effect is won by a map lottery described later, a mechanical effect by the pair of movable units described above, an effect by lighting operation of the accessory LED 23b and a sound output operation. Although the example which performs the interlocking production with is demonstrated, this invention is not limited to this. Such an interlocking effect may be performed also when the effect by the movable accessory 23 is performed at a timing other than the time when the map lottery is won.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, although the example which links the mechanical effect by a pair of movable unit and the effect by the accessory LED23b provided in the movable accessory 23 was demonstrated, this invention is not limited to this. For example, not only the accessory LED 23b provided on the movable accessory 23 but also the effect by various lamps attached to the decorative frame 30 of the front panel 1b and the mechanical effect by the pair of movable units may be linked. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the example in which the mechanical effect by the pair of movable units, the effect by the accessory LED 23b, and the effect by the sound output are operated in conjunction based on the detection result of the detection element 74 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the detection result of the detection element 74, only the effect by the accessory LED 23b may be linked with the mechanical effect by the pair of movable units.

  Furthermore, the number of rotation steps of various acceleration operations or deceleration operations in the operation sequence of the movable accessory 23 described above is not limited to the above example. The number of steps of the rotating operation of the movable accessory 23 can be arbitrarily set according to conditions such as the rotation range of the movable accessory 23, for example.

<Configuration of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, a reel effect (reel action) and locking are performed in a gaming state referred to as a “continuous lock state (chance zone)” to be described later, and the reel control at this time is performed by the main control circuit 41. . Further, in this embodiment, even in a game state called “normal state” (ART inactive state), a lock effect is performed based on map information that defines various lock effect patterns. This is performed by the main control circuit 41. Therefore, in the present embodiment, various data tables (see FIGS. 57 to 64 and FIGS. 67 to 83) necessary for the reel effect and the lock effect are also stored in the main ROM 52.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data (hereinafter referred to as symbol code (in FIG. 22) that specifies the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R and the type of symbol arranged at each position. )))).

  In the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol arranged in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as “0”. Then, in each reel, “0” to “20” corresponding to the symbol counter are set as symbol positions in the order of advance in the reel rotation direction (the direction of arrow A in FIG. 22) with reference to symbol position “0”. Assigned to a symbol.

  That is, the symbols displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel within the frame of the display window 4 by referring to the symbol counter values (“0” to “20”) and the symbol arrangement table. Can be specified. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is “7”, the upper, middle, and lower regions of the left reel 3L within the frame of the display window 4 are respectively “ Symbols corresponding to “bell A”, “watermelon” at symbol position “7”, and “lip” at symbol position “6” are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table defines a correspondence relationship between a symbol combination predetermined according to the type of privilege, a display combination (storage area), and a payout number. In FIGS. 23 to 26, the combination of symbols displayed in the case where the small combination related to “Bell” has been won internally but the combination of the symbol related to “Bell” cannot be displayed. ("Bell spill 1" to "Bell spill 20") are also described. The display of the symbol combinations related to these “bell spills” is one of the transition conditions for the RT gaming state, as will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the winning combination is determined when the symbol combination displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table along the winning determination line. Is done. When it is determined that a prize is won, the player is given benefits such as a medal payout, a re-game operation, and a bonus game operation. If the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “losing”. That is, in this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “losing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination “losing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the item “losing” may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define “losing”.

  Various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table is data for identifying a symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line. “Data” in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (content of display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

  The “storage area” data in the display combination column is data for designating a display combination storage area (see FIG. 84) described later in which the corresponding display combination is stored. In the present embodiment, 25 display combination storage areas are provided. In the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1-byte data pattern) and having different contents are managed as different display combinations depending on the “storage area”.

  The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the “paid-out number” data, the same number of medals are paid out. In the present embodiment, for example, when one of “middle bell 1” to “middle bell 8” is determined as the display combination, medals are paid out. In this case, 14 medals are paid out regardless of the number of inserted sheets (3 or 2). For example, when any one of “watermelon upper stage 1” to “watermelon upper stage 8” is determined as the display combination and the inserted number is 3, 12 medals are paid out, and the inserted number is 2 In the case of a sheet, 14 medals are paid out. In the present embodiment, the display combination from which such medals are paid out is collectively referred to as “small combination”.

  In the present embodiment, combinations of symbols relating to replay (replay) as a display combination, for example, “7 Lip”, “BAR Lip”, “Lip”, “Chance” shown in the symbol combination tables of FIGS. When any one of the symbol combinations related to “Lip” and “RT1 Lip” to “RT4 Lip” is determined, the re-game is performed. Further, when one of “BB1” and “BB2” is determined as the display combination, the big bonus game is activated.

[Bonus operating table]
Next, the bonus operation time table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus operation time table stores data stored in a game state flag storage area (see FIG. 85) provided in the main RAM 53, a bonus end number counter, a game possible number counter, and a winning possible number counter provided in the main RAM 53 during a bonus game. Stipulate.

  The game state flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game being operated. In the present embodiment, a regular bonus (“RB”) and a big bonus (“BB”) are provided as bonus games. Note that “RB” is a so-called first type special combination. “BB” is referred to as an accessory continuous operation device related to the first type special accessory, and “RB” is operated continuously. Therefore, when “BB” is activated, “RB” is also activated. In the present embodiment, two types of “BB” (“BB1” and “BB2”) are provided. In the present embodiment, “BB1” and “BB2” are managed by the same game state flag, but the present invention is not limited to this, and individual game state flags are assigned to “BB1” and “BB2”. It may be given.

  The numerical value of the bonus end number counter stipulated in the bonus operation time table is data indicating the number of medals to be paid out (specified number) that triggers the end of the bonus game. In the present embodiment, the operations of “BB1” and “BB2” are ended when a larger number of medals are paid out than the prescribed number “336”.

  Specifically, first, the numerical value of the “bonus end number counter” defined in the bonus operation time table is actually stored in the bonus end number counter. Next, after the BB operation, every time a medal is paid out, the value of the bonus end number counter is subtracted. Then, the operation of “BB” is terminated on condition that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (negative value).

  The game possible number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can be played at the time of RB operation, so-called possible number of games. The winning possible number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can display a combination of symbols related to winning at the time of RB operation, so-called winning possible number.

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence relationship between the RT gaming state transition conditions and the transition source and destination RT gaming states.

  In the present embodiment, as the RT gaming state, six types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state, having different winning probabilities for replaying (replay) are provided. Specifically, as shown in various internal lottery tables (see FIGS. 30 to 35) described later, the winning probability (medium probability) of the re-game in the RT2 gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state. And the winning probability (high probability) of replaying in the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state is higher than that of the RT2 gaming state.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) refers to the RT transition table to control the transition of the RT gaming state. For details of the transition flow of the RT gaming state, More specific description will be given later with reference to FIG. In the present specification, for example, “RT0 gaming state” to “RT5 gaming state” are game states controlled by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) (including “BB gaming state” described later). It is also called “game state”.

[Internal lottery table determination table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines a correspondence relationship between the internal lottery table used in various gaming states, the number of medals inserted, and the number of lotteries.

  For example, when the game state is a general game (non-bonus game) state, an internal lottery table for general game state (see FIGS. 30 to 35) described later is used, and “54” is set as the number of lotteries. Further, when the gaming state is the RB gaming state (BB gaming state), an RB gaming state internal lottery table (see FIG. 36) described later is used, and “1” is set as the number of lotteries. In the present embodiment, when the game state is a general game (non-bonus game) state, one game is performed by inserting three medals, and when the game state is an RB game state (BB game state). One game is played with the insertion of two medals.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, an internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal lottery table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the lottery value when this data pointer is determined in various winning numbers.

  The data pointer is data acquired as a result of lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is used for designating an internal symbol combination specified by an internal symbol combination determination table (see FIGS. 37 to 43) described later. It is data. The data pointer is provided with a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer. The lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of the lottery set in advance.

  In the internal lottery processing of the present embodiment, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535) are sequentially subtracted by lottery values defined corresponding to each winning number. Next, it is determined (internal lottery) whether the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the result of the subtraction becomes negative (a “digit” occurs) at a predetermined winning number, it means that the winning number is won, and the data pointer assigned to the corresponding winning number is acquired.

  Therefore, in the internal lottery process according to the present embodiment, the larger the number specified as the lottery value, the higher the probability that assigned data (that is, the data pointer) is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by “the lottery value specified for each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random denominator: 65536)”.

(1) General gaming state (RT0) internal lottery table FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a configuration of a general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0). This internal lottery table for a general gaming state is used when the gaming state is a general gaming state (non-bonus gaming state) and the RT gaming state is an RT0 gaming state.

  The internal lottery table for the general gaming state defines the relationship between the lottery value corresponding to the winning numbers “1” to “54” and the data pointer. For example, in the general gaming state, when referring to the general gaming state internal lottery table, the probability that the winning number “1” is won and “1” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer is “8400 / 65536 ".

  In the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the internal winning combination corresponding to the small role / replay data pointers “1” to “27” is a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, “7 lip” “ BAR Lip ”,“ Rip ”,“ Chance Lip ”,“ RT1 Lip ”to“ RT4 Lip ”) (see the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIGS. 38 to 43 described later). In the RT0 gaming state, in each setting (settings 1 to 6), the sum of the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “27” corresponding to the internal winning combination relating to the re-game is “8977”. Therefore, in the RT0 gaming state, the probability that the internal winning combination related to the re-game is won internally is “8977/65536”.

  In addition, the internal winning combination corresponding to the small combination / replay data pointers “28” to “51” is a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, “bell”, “determined combination”, “watermelon”, “ Internal winning combination for “Gate”, “Strong Gate”, “Medium Cherry”, “Square Cherry”, and “Strong Cherry”). In the winning numbers “1” to “51”, the bonus pointer is “0”, and “BB” and the other combination (small role / replay) do not overlap.

  In the general game state internal lottery table, a winning pointer “52” is assigned a bonus pointer “1”, and a small role / replay data pointer “0” is assigned. In other words, in the winning number “52”, only “BB” (“BB1” and “BB2”) is won internally, and “BB” and other roles (small role / replay) are not duplicated (described later). (Refer to the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 37).

  Further, in the general game state internal lottery table, the winning pointer “53” is assigned the bonus pointer “1” and the small role / replay data pointer “26”. The winning number “54” is assigned a bonus pointer “1” and a small role / replay data pointer “51”. That is, in the winning numbers “53” and “54”, “BB” and other combinations (small combination / replay) are won in duplicate. In the RT0 gaming state, the sum of lottery values for each winning number in each setting is “21490”, and the probability of “losing” is “44046/65536”.

(2) RT1 internal lottery table FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a configuration of the RT1 internal lottery table. The RT1 internal lottery table is used when the gaming state is the general gaming state (non-bonus gaming state) and the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. The RT1 internal lottery table defines the relationship between lottery values and data pointers in the winning numbers “1” to “27”.

  When the RT1 internal lottery table is selected, the lottery values defined in the winning numbers “1” to “27” in the general gaming state (RT0) internal lottery table shown in FIG. The lottery value defined in the internal lottery table is overwritten. As a result, the winning probability of the internal winning combination (winning numbers “1” to “27”) related to the replay that can be won is changed. At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery values of the winning numbers “28” to “54” in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in the RT1 gaming state, the sum of the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “27” corresponding to the internal winning combination related to the replay (replay) of each setting (settings 1 to 6) is “11077”. It becomes. Therefore, in the RT1 gaming state, the probability that the internal winning combination relating to re-game is won internally is “11077/65536”, which is slightly higher than that in the RT0 gaming state (8977/65536).

(3) RT2 internal lottery table FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a configuration of the RT2 internal lottery table. The RT2 internal lottery table is used when the gaming state is the general gaming state (non-bonus gaming state) and the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. The RT2 internal lottery table defines the relationship between lottery values and data pointers in the winning numbers “1” to “27”.

  When the RT2 internal lottery table is selected, the lottery values defined in the winning numbers “1” to “27” in the general gaming state (RT0) internal lottery table shown in FIG. The lottery value defined in the internal lottery table is overwritten. As a result, the winning probability of the internal winning combination (winning numbers “1” to “27”) related to the replay that can be won is changed. At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery values of the winning numbers “28” to “54” in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in the RT2 gaming state, the sum of the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “27” corresponding to the internal winning combination relating to the replay (replay) of each setting (settings 1 to 6) is “20000”. It becomes. Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, the probability that the internal winning combination related to the re-game is won is “20000/65536”, which is higher than that in the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state (8977/65536 and 11077/65536). In the internal lottery table for RT2, lottery values (“1250”) are defined for each of the winning numbers “7” to “22”, and related to “RT1 lip”, “RT3 lip”, and “RT4 lip”. It is set so that the internal winning combination of replay is easy to win.

(4) RT3 internal lottery table FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a configuration of the RT3 internal lottery table. The RT3 internal lottery table is used when the gaming state is the general gaming state (non-bonus gaming state) and the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state. The RT3 internal lottery table defines the relationship between lottery values and data pointers in the winning numbers “1” to “27”.

  When the RT3 internal lottery table is selected, the lottery values defined in the winning numbers “1” to “27” in the general gaming state (RT0) internal lottery table shown in FIG. The lottery value defined in the internal lottery table is overwritten. As a result, the winning probability of the internal winning combination (winning numbers “1” to “27”) related to the replay that can be won is changed. At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery values of the winning numbers “28” to “54” in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in the RT3 gaming state, the sum of the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “27” corresponding to the internal winning combination relating to the replay (replay) of each setting (settings 1 to 6) is “36087”. It becomes. Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, the probability that the internal winning combination related to the re-game is won is “36087/65536”, which is higher than that in the RT2 gaming state (20000/65536).

(5) RT4 internal lottery table FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a configuration of the RT4 internal lottery table. The RT4 internal lottery table is used when the gaming state is the general gaming state (non-bonus gaming state) and the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state. The RT4 internal lottery table defines the relationship between lottery values and data pointers in the winning numbers “1” to “27”.

  When the RT4 internal lottery table is selected, in the general gaming state (RT0) internal lottery table shown in FIG. 30, the lottery values defined in the winning numbers “1” to “27” The lottery value specified in the lottery table is overwritten. As a result, the winning probability of the internal winning combination (winning numbers “1” to “27”) related to the replay that can be won is changed. At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery values of the winning numbers “28” to “54” in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in the RT4 gaming state, the sum of the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “27” corresponding to the internal winning combination relating to the replay (replay) of each setting (settings 1 to 6) is “21251”. It becomes. Therefore, in the RT4 gaming state, the probability of winning the internal winning combination related to re-playing is “21251/65536”, which is lower than that in the RT3 gaming state (36087/65536), but that in the RT2 gaming state (20000 / Slightly higher than that of 65536). In the internal lottery table for RT4, a lottery value (“21251”) is defined only for the winning number “24”, and is set so that the internal winning combination of the replay related to “7 lips” is easy to win. Yes.

(6) RT5 internal lottery table FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RT5 internal lottery table. The RT5 internal lottery table is used when the gaming state is the general gaming state (non-bonus gaming state) and the RT gaming state is the RT5 gaming state. The RT5 internal lottery table defines the relationship between lottery values and data pointers in the winning numbers “1” to “27”.

  When the RT5 internal lottery table is selected, the lottery values defined in the winning numbers “1” to “27” in the general gaming state (RT0) internal lottery table shown in FIG. The lottery value defined in the internal lottery table is overwritten. As a result, the winning probability of the internal winning combination (winning numbers “1” to “27”) related to the replay that can be won is changed. At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery values of the winning numbers “28” to “54” in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in the RT5 gaming state, the sum of the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “27” corresponding to the internal winning combination relating to the replay (replay) of each setting (settings 1 to 6) is “8977”. It becomes. Therefore, in the RT5 gaming state, the probability that the internal winning combination related to the re-game is won is “8977/65536”, which is the same as that in the RT0 gaming state. In the RT5 gaming state, the winning probability (8977/65536) of the winning number “1” is slightly higher than that in the RT0 gaming state (8400/65536).

  Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the internal winning combination related to re-game is changed according to the RT gaming state, so the probability of “losing” also changes according to the RT gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the standard game state (RT0) internal lottery table serving as a reference, winning numbers “1” to “1” corresponding to the internal winning combinations related to replay (replay) according to the RT game state. Although the table defining only the lottery value of “27” is used to change only the lottery value related to replay, the present invention is not limited to this. Separately from the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (for RT0), an internal lottery table for RT1 to RT5 that defines the relationship between lottery values and data pointers for all winning numbers may be provided.

(7) RB internal lottery table FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a configuration of an RB internal lottery table. This RB internal lottery table is referred to when the gaming state is the RB gaming state (BB gaming state). The RB internal lottery table defines the correspondence between lottery values and data pointers corresponding to the winning number “1”.

  In this embodiment, since the lottery value of the winning number “1” defined in the RB internal lottery table is “65536”, the winning number “1” is always won in the BB gaming state (RB gaming state). The small pointer / replay data pointer “52” is acquired. Note that the internal winning combinations corresponding to the small combination / replay data pointer “52” are all “small winning combinations” (see the internal winning combination determination table for small combination / replay shown in FIGS. 38 to 43 described later). . The lottery value defined for the winning number “1” is commonly used in the settings 1 to 6.

[Internal winning combination determination table]
Next, an internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the data pointer is determined, the internal winning combination data is uniquely acquired by the internal winning combination determination table.

  The “internal winning combination” in the internal winning combination determination table is data for identifying a combination of symbols on the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R that is permitted to be displayed along the winning determination line. The “internal winning combination” is represented by 1-byte data like the “display combination” in the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, and is a unique symbol for each bit in the 1-byte data. Are assigned. When the data pointer is “0”, the content of “internal winning combination” is “losing”, which is a combination of all symbols defined by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. Indicates that the display of is not allowed.

(1) Bonus internal winning combination determination table FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a configuration of the bonus internal winning combination determination table. The bonus internal winning combination determination table defines internal winning combinations related to the operation of the bonus game with respect to bonus data pointers “1” to “4”.

  In the bonus internal winning combination determination table, “◯” indicates an internal winning combination to be won in the acquired bonus data pointer. For example, when “1” is acquired as the bonus data pointer, “BB1” and “BB2” are duplicated as internal winning combinations.

(2) Small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table FIGS. 38 to 43 are diagrams showing the configuration of the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determining table. The small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determining table defines small winning combinations and replay winning combinations that are internally won for “1” to “52” of the small winning combination / replay data pointer. That is, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines a correspondence relationship between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the internal winning combination relating to the payout of medals or the internal winning combination relating to the replay operation.

  The symbol “◯” in the small winning combination / replay winning symbol determination table indicates the internal winning combination to be won in the acquired small winning combination / replay data pointer. For example, when “1” is acquired as the data pointer for the small part / replay, “Rip Upper 1” to “Rip Upper 8”, “Rip CD (Crossdown) 1” to “Rip” “CD8” and “Lip CU (cross-up) 1” to “Lip CU4” are duplicated. Further, for example, when “28” is acquired as the data pointer for the small role / replay, “Bell middle stage 1” to “Bell middle stage 8”, “Bell CD1”, and “Bell CD2” are used as the internal winning combinations. ""

[Cylinder stop number selection table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the rotating cylinder stop number selection table will be described. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the small role / replay data pointer and the rotation stop number. The rotation stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process described later.

  In the present embodiment, the spinning cylinder stop number selection table defines different spinning cylinder stop numbers for each small role / replay data pointer. For example, when the data pointer for the small role / replay is “3”, the spinning stop number “3” is selected.

  In the present embodiment, the example of specifying the different rotation stop number for each small role / replay data pointer is shown as the rotation stop number selection table. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The same rotation stop number may be defined for different small role / replay data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel stop initial setting table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIG. The reel stop initial setting table defines a correspondence relationship between the rotation stop number and various data used in a pull-in priority table selection process described later and a number of sliding pieces determination process of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes the rotation stop number, the pull-in priority table selection table number, the pull-in priority table number, the forward push table selection data, the forward push table change data, and the forward push push It defines the correspondence between the table change initial data and the table selection data when anomaly is pressed.

  The pull-in priority table selection table number and the pull-in priority table number are data used for the pull-in priority table selection process. For example, in the reel stop initial setting table, if a pull-in priority table number corresponding to the spinning stop number is defined, it corresponds to the pull-in priority table number defined in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 53). Data relating to the priority order of the display combination can be acquired. In addition, in the reel stop initial setting table, if the drawing priority table number corresponding to the turn stop number is not defined, the drawing priority table selection table corresponding to the drawing priority table selection table number (see FIG. 52). With reference to FIG. 4, the pull-in priority table number is determined.

  The table selection data at the time of forward push, the table change data at the time of forward push, and the initial table change data at the time of forward push designate a stop table (see FIG. 46 and FIGS. 48 to 50) to be referred to when the forward push is performed. It is data to do. In this specification, the “forward push” is a stop operation when the first stop operation (first stop operation) is performed on the left reel 3L. Corresponds to the pressing order of “middle left” and “middle left”

  The irregular pressing table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIG. 51) to be referred to when irregular pressing is performed. In this specification, “anomalous push” is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and “middle left / right”, “middle right / left”, “ It corresponds to the order of pressing “middle right” and “middle right”.

  In the present embodiment, basically, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped within 190 msec. Specifically, one of the number of sliding symbols “0” to “4” is added to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the reel when the stop operation is detected, and the value obtained corresponds to the value obtained. The symbol position is determined as the symbol position at which the reel rotation stops (this is referred to as “scheduled stop position”). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel starts to be stopped, and this is referred to as a “stop start position”.

  In other words, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel from when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the corresponding reel stops. In other words, the number of symbols passing through the middle stage area of the corresponding reel of the display window 4 in the period from when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the corresponding reel stops. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S.

  Referring to the stop table, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is a tentative one, and the acquired number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the planned stop position of the reel.

  In the present embodiment, when there is an appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces acquired based on a stop table described later (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”), a pull-in priority table described later The number of sliding pieces is changed with reference to (see FIG. 53). Then, the sliding piece number determination data is referred to in order to determine the search order when the priority order is compared for each of the symbols from the stop start position to the 4th symbol position that is the maximum number of sliding symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the stop table to be referenced is properly used according to the forward push and the irregular push. In the case of the forward push, the first stop table (see FIG. 46) at the time of the forward push and the second and third stop stop tables at the time of the forward push (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are referred to. On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, the irregular pressing stop table (see FIG. 51) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop when pushing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the first stop table for forward pressing will be described. The forward stop first stop table shown in FIG. 46 is referred to when the forward push table selection data is “01”. The first stop table at the time of forward pressing defines the correspondence relationship between the stop start positions “0” to “20” of the left reel 3L, the number of sliding pieces determination data, and the change status. The change status is used when referring to a forward-pressing control change table (see FIG. 47) described later.

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the forward pressing control change table will be described. The forward push control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (scheduled stop position of the left reel 3L), the change data selection value, the change status, and the second and third stop table numbers for forward push. . The change data selection value is a value obtained by adding the table change data and the change status at the time of forward pressing. For example, the change data change value acquired based on the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 45) and the first stop table for forward pressing (see FIG. 46) is “1”, and the left reel 3L is scheduled to stop. If the position is “18”, the change status is “0”, and the stop table number for the second and third stops is “09” at the time of forward pressing. In the forward-pressing control change table, the stop table number is not changed when change table data is not registered at the target position.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when pushing forward and stop table when pushing irregularly]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 51, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing will be described. The stop table for the second and third stops and the stop table for irregularity when pushing forward define 1-byte stop data according to each of the symbol positions “0” to “20”.

  48 is referred to when the second / third stop table for stoppage is “09”. Further, the second- and third-stop stop tables for forward pressing shown in FIG. 49 are referred to when the second- and third-stop stop table numbers for forward press are “10”. Furthermore, the second and third stop table for the second and third stops at the time of the forward push shown in FIG.

  The irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 51 is referred to when the irregular time table selection data is “03”. When a combination of stop data of the A line data of each reel surrounded by a thick solid line in the irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 51 is obtained, the combination of symbols related to “bell middle stage 1” (“bell A "-" Bell A "-" Bell A ") is displayed on the winning determination line (center line). When a combination of stop data of A line data of each reel surrounded by a double line in the irregular push stop table is obtained, a combination of symbols (“Bell B” − “Bell B” − “Bell B”) is displayed on the winning determination line (center line).

  In the stop data specified by the stop tables of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity, is the symbol position associated with the stop data appropriate as the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped? Has information on whether or not. The stop data includes information indicating whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, the bit corresponding to the “A line” column and the “B line” column in each stop table. Assign to the bit corresponding to. The stop data is defined by assigning information about which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bit corresponding to the “line change” column in each stop table.

  In other words, the second and third stop tables for stoppages and the stop table for anomalies at the time of forward pressing define a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the rotation of the reels is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, the position where the reel rotation is stopped can be varied based on the stop position at the time of the first stop. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to compress information.

  The determination of the number of sliding piece determination data is performed as follows. First, it is specified which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to bit 1) constituting the stop data is referred to according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the column of “middle reel A line data” of bit 4 is designated.

  Then, referring to the designated bit string, a search is sequentially performed as to whether or not “1” is defined as the corresponding data for each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position where “1” is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and this difference is used as the number of sliding piece determination data.

  Whether or not the bit string to be referred to is changed from the “A line” column to the “B line” column refers to the “line change” column and “1” is defined in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not. When it is determined that the line is to be changed, the column “B line” is designated thereafter, and the above search is performed.

[Pull-in priority table selection table]
Next, the pull-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority selection number and the stop button pressing order, and the pull-in priority table number in each combination. The pull-in priority table number is data for acquiring information related to the priority order of display combinations defined in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 53).

  For example, when the first drum (left reel 3L) is first stopped, the data in the column of “first drum (left reel) first stop” in the pull-in priority table selection table is referred to. Then, when the first drum (left reel 3L) is stopped for the first time and the pull-in priority table selection data is “1”, the pull-in priority table regardless of the pressing order of the second stop and the third stop. “02” is acquired as the number.

  Further, for example, when the first drum (left reel 3L) is stopped for the first time and the pull-in priority table selection data is “19”, the middle reel 3C is pressed at the second stop, and the right at the third stop. When the reel 3R is pressed (when the pressing order is correct), the pull-in priority table number is changed from “05” to “04”. However, when the first drum (the left reel 3L) is stopped for the first time and the pull-in priority table selection data is “19”, the right reel 3R is pressed in the second stop, and the middle reel 3C in the third stop. When is pressed (when the push order is incorrect), the pull-in priority table number is not changed and “05” is acquired as the pull-in priority table number.

[Pull-in priority table]
Next, the drawing priority table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table defines the correspondence between the pull-in data for each storage area type and the predetermined priority in each of the pull-in priority table numbers “00” to “05”.

  The pull-in priority order table is used for searching whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order of priority stop display (drawn) between the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Each pull-in data is similar to “internal winning combination” in the internal winning combination determination table shown in FIGS. 37 to 43 and “display combination” in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. It is represented by byte data, and a unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit in the one-byte data.

  In the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the above-described first stop table for first stop (see FIG. 46). However, when there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. In other words, in the present embodiment, a more appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols that allow the stop display by the internal winning combination regardless of the number of sliding symbols acquired from the stop table.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, not only does the priority of the internal winning combination differ according to the pull-in priority table number, but also the number of priority divisions differs. Specifically, when the pull-in priority table number is “00” to “02”, the number of priority divisions is 5, and when the pull-in priority table number is “03”, the priority order is And the number of priority priority table numbers is “04” and “05”, the priority priority number is 2. Here, in order to simplify the description, the priority when the pull-in priority table number is “00” will be described, and the description of the priorities in other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted.

  When the pull-in priority table number is “00”, the priority “1” includes “watermelon middle stage 3” to “watermelon middle stage 4”, “watermelon CD1” to “watermelon CD4”, “bell lower stage 1” to “ The pull-in data corresponding to the bell lower stage 6 ”and“ RT4 lip 1 ”to“ RT4 lip 8 ”are defined. The priority “2” includes “bell middle stage 1” to “bell middle stage 8”, “RT2 lip 1” to “RT2 lip 4”, and “RT3 lip 1” to “RT3 lip 2”. Is defined.

  The priority “3” includes “all cherries”, “all gates 1” to “all gates 4”, “lip CU1” to “lip CU4”, “lip CD1” to “lip CD8”, and “lip top 1”. Pull-in data corresponding to “Lip upper stage 8”, “7 Lip middle stage 1” to “7 Lip middle stage 10”, and “7 Lip CU1” to “7 Lip CU4” are defined. Note that “all cherries” means all internal winning combinations related to “cherry” defined in the internal winning combination determination table in FIGS. 37 to 43 (“middle cherry 1”, “middle cherry 2”, “corner”). Cherry 1 ”,“ horn cherry 2 ”,“ strong cherry 1 ”to“ strong cherry 4 ”). Further, “all gates 1” to “all gates 4” are “gate upper stage 1” to “gate upper stage 4” and “gate lower stage 1” defined in the internal winning combination determination table in FIGS. Represents the internal winning combination of “gate lower stage 4” and “strong gate 1” to “strong gate 4”.

  The priority “4” includes “RT1 lip middle stage 1” to “RT1 lip middle stage 2”, “RT1 lip lower stage 9” to “RT1 lip lower stage 16”, “RT1 lip upper stage 1” to “RT1 lip upper stage 8”, In addition, pull-in data corresponding to “7 Lip CU5” to “7 Lip CU6” is defined. The priority “5” includes “chance lip top 1” to “chance lip top 8”, “chance lip CD1” to “chance lip CD3”, “BAR lip top 1” to “BAR lip top 5”, Pull-in data corresponding to “BAR lip middle stage 1” to “BAR lip middle stage 6”, “BB1”, and “BB2” is defined.

  When the pull-in priority table number is “00”, the stop display (withdrawal) of the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination specified in the priority “1” is displayed from the stop display of other symbol combinations. Is also given priority.

[Search order table]
Next, the search order table will be described with reference to FIG. The search order table preferentially applies from the range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding frames (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding frames is 4) (hereinafter referred to as “search order”). ").

  The search order table defines the sliding piece number determination data obtained based on the stop table and the search order. That is, in this embodiment, the order of numerical values to be preferentially applied is determined based on the sliding piece number determination data. In addition, the search order table is provided assuming that there are a plurality of sliding frames having the same priority, and the search order table is applied in a higher order.

  In the present embodiment, as described in the priority attraction-in control process of FIG. 124 described later, each numerical value is sequentially searched from the search order “5” in the lower order of the search order table to correspond to the search order “1”. The number of sliding frames is preferentially applied from the numerical value to be used.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination and pressing order]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the pressing order will be described. FIG. 55 is a correspondence table of internal winning combinations and pressing order, and “RT1” to “RT4” shown in FIG. 55 indicate RT game states of the transfer destination.

  In this embodiment, FIGS. 37 to 43 show stop indications of combinations of various symbols related to “RT1 Lip” to “RT4 Lip” defined in the internal winning combination determination table, and various symbols related to “Bell”. The success or failure of the combination stop display is related to the operation of each RT gaming state, as shown in the RT gaming state transition condition in the RT transition table (see FIG. 28). In this embodiment, the order of pressing is different for the success / failure of the stop display of various symbol combinations related to “RT1 Lip” to “RT4 Lip” and the stop display of various symbol combinations related to “Bell”. Is set.

  For example, when “11” is acquired as the data pointer for small part / replay, “RT1 lip”, “RT3 lip” and “RT3 lip” are defined as defined in the internal winning combination determination tables of FIGS. Internal winning combinations that permit display of various symbol combinations related to “RT4 Lip” are determined. In this case (small role / replay data pointer “11”), the pressing order of “middle left and right” surrounded by a thick solid line in FIG. 55 and “middle right and left” surrounded by a double line in FIG. Is assigned.

  In other words, if “11” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, “RT3 Lip” (“RT3 Lip”) is provided on the condition that the stop button pressed by the player is “middle left and right”. 1 ”or“ RT3 Lip 2 ”) is stopped and displayed. When the stop button pressed by the player is “middle right / left”, the combination of symbols related to “RT4 Lip” (“RT4 Lip 1” to “RT4 Lip 8”) is stopped and displayed. Is done. On the other hand, when the order of pressing performed by the player is not “middle left / right” and “middle right / left”, the combination of symbols related to “RT1 Lip” is stopped and displayed.

  That is, when the player executes the pushing order set in each of the small role / replay data pointers “2” to “22” and surrounded by the thick solid line and the double line in FIG. It becomes possible to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Note that the “advantageous gaming state” here refers to a gaming state in which a transition to the RT3 gaming state (ART state) is finally possible. In the present embodiment, as shown in the RT transition table of FIG. 28, in order to shift from the RT1 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, it is necessary to go through the RT2 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, here, not only the RT3 gaming state but also the RT2 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are included in the “advantageous gaming state”.

  Further, for example, when “29 to 36” is acquired as the data pointer for the small role / replay, the internal winning combination that permits the display of the symbol combination related to “Bell” is determined (FIGS. 37 to 37). 43). And the push order of “middle left and right” and “middle right and left” surrounded by the thick solid line in FIG. 55 is assigned to the data pointers “29 to 36” for the small role / replay.

  For example, if “29” is acquired as the data pointer for the small role / replay, the “bell” (“bell” is set on the condition that the pressing order performed by the player is “middle left / right” or “middle right / left”. The combination of symbols relating to “middle stage 1”, “bell middle stage 6” and “bell lower stage 1” to “bell lower stage 6”) is stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 37 to 43). On the other hand, if the player's pressing order is not “middle left and right” and “middle right and left”, the combination of symbols related to “bell” if the stop button pressing timing for the rotating reel is a predetermined timing (correct answer) Is stopped. If the timing of pressing the stop button on the rotating reel is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), the combination of symbols related to “Bell spill” (“Bell spill 1” to “Bell spill 20”) ( 26) is stopped and displayed.

[Pattern winning action flag data table]
Next, the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the internal winning combination data that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the winning determination line. That is, by referring to the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table, the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time can be determined. The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 23 to 26).

  For example, when the symbol “gold 7” is stopped and displayed on the winning determination line of the left reel 3L, in the storage areas 1 to 25 corresponding to the symbol code “00000001” (gold 7) in the reel type “left”, “1” is stored in a bit corresponding to a displayable internal winning combination. Data defined in the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is logically AND stored with data stored in a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 88) described later.

[Flag conversion table]
Next, the flag conversion table will be described with reference to FIG. The flag conversion table defines the correspondence between the winning number and the production flag number.

  In the present embodiment, in a gaming state referred to as a “continuous lock state (chance zone)” described later, a predetermined reel effect and lock are executed according to the winning number (internal winning combination). It is determined according to the number, and the production flag number is a value used at that time. The flag conversion table is referred to during an effect flag selection process (see FIG. 104) described later.

[Direction lottery table for continuous lock state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a continuous lottery effect lottery table will be described. The continuous lottery effect lottery table defines the correspondence between the production flag number, the count subtraction value, the production content lottery value, the production lottery value, and the first reel control flag.

  The continuous lottery effect lottery table is referred to in the below-described continuous lottery state effect lottery processing (see FIGS. 106 and 107). At that time, the count subtraction value, the effect content lottery value, the effect lottery value, and the first reel control flag are used for controlling the effect operation in the “continuous lock state (chance zone)” described later.

  Further, each internal winning combination described in the “content” column of the continuous lottery effect lottery table is an internal winning combination that is won by the corresponding effect flag number (winning number). For example, in the effect lottery table for the continuous lock state in FIG. 58, “normal & push order lip” corresponds to the effect flag number “02”. In this case, the production flag number “02” corresponds to the winning numbers “1” to “22” and “25” to “27” (see FIG. 57). The internal symbol combination corresponding to the data pointer is “normal & push order lip”.

[Reel production pattern table]
Next, the reel effect pattern table will be described with reference to FIG. The reel effect pattern table shown in FIG. 59 is mainly referred to in a lock process at the time of a game start operation which will be described later. Therefore, the “reel effect pattern” defined in FIG. 59 corresponds to the reel effect pattern performed during the reel control process (hereinafter referred to as acceleration process) from the start of the game until the reel is driven at a constant speed. To do. Note that this acceleration processing period is a period during which a player cannot perform a game operation (substantially equivalent to a lock state). Therefore, in the reel effect performed during the acceleration process, it is not necessary to perform a separate lock process, so that the amount of data necessary for the reel effect can be reduced and the process can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, the lock process may be performed even at the end of the game (see FIG. 127). In this case, a reel effect pattern table (not shown) prepared separately is referred to. The present invention is not limited to this, and the same reel effect pattern table may be referred to in a game start lock process and a game end lock process described later.

  Note that the reel effect pattern “00” in FIG. 59 is a reel effect pattern that is selected in a normal acceleration process performed during a normal game. In this case, the reel effect is not performed in the acceleration process. The reel effect patterns “01” to “13” are reel effect patterns that are selected during a start operation in a “continuous lock state (chance zone)” described later. Further, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, although not described in detail, a reel effect is performed during the acceleration processing period even when a bonus is won. The reel effect patterns “14” and “15” are reel effect patterns selected when the bonus is won.

  The reel effect pattern table shows a correspondence relationship between the value (number) of the reel effect pattern, the count subtraction value, the value of the continuous lock state counter, and the value of the first reel control flag.

  For example, when the count subtraction value is “1” (when the first reel control flag is “3”), a predetermined effect (“1 subtraction action”) corresponding to the value “01” of the reel effect pattern is performed. Is called. In the “1 subtraction action”, for example, effects such as a single reel action and a locking operation are performed.

  For example, when the value of the continuous lock state counter is “1” (when the first reel control flag is “6”), a predetermined effect corresponding to the value “04” of the reel effect pattern (“confirmation notification”). (1 subtraction action) ”) is performed. In the “confirmation notification (1 subtraction action)”, for example, not only one reel action and locking operation, but also an effect of notifying on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 10 that the transition to ART is confirmed is performed. Is called.

  As shown in the reel effect pattern table (FIG. 59) and the continuous lock state effect lottery table (FIG. 58), in this embodiment, the count subtraction value is any one of “1” to “3”. Therefore, in the “continuous lock state”, a count subtraction value of at least “1” or more is obtained for each unit game.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the values of the first reel control flag “3”, “4” and “1”, with respect to the count subtraction values “1”, “2” and “3”, “5” is associated with each. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the values “6” to “15” of the first reel control flag are associated with the values “1” to “10” of the continuous lock state counter, respectively. As will be described later, when the reel effect and the lock processing are performed in the continuous lock state, among the values “3” to “15” of the first reel control flag, “3” to “5” are count subtraction values. The information indicating that the reel effect and the lock are performed is based on “6” to “15”, and the information indicating that the reel effect and the lock are performed based on the value of the continuous lock state counter.

[Reel effect data selection table]
Next, the reel effect data selection table will be described with reference to FIG. The reel effect data selection table shown in FIG. 60 is referred to in a lock process at the time of a game start operation described later, similarly to the reel effect pattern data shown in FIG.

  The reel effect data selection table shows the correspondence between the value (number) of the reel effect pattern and the reel effect data selection index that specifies the reel effect to be executed. For example, when the value of the reel effect pattern is “02”, the reel effect data corresponding to the reel effect data selection index “RESEL_E04” is selected.

[Reel production code determination table]
Next, the reel effect code determination table (variation pattern determination means) will be described with reference to FIG. The reel effect code determination table shown in FIG. 61 is also referred to in the lock process at the time of the game start operation described later, similarly to the reel effect pattern data shown in FIG.

  The reel effect code determination table constitutes each reel effect data selection index (selection information of a predetermined variation pattern) shown in FIG. 60 and a reel effect execution code (execution data) corresponding to the reel effect data selection index. The correspondence relationship with the reel production code index for specifying the reel production code (sub execution data) to be performed is shown. Here, first, the specified contents of the data in the reel effect code determination table are, for example, when the reel effect data selection index is “RESEL_E04” (when the reel effect pattern “02” is selected during the “continuous lock state”). ) For example.

  When the reel effect data selection index is “RESEL_E04”, as shown in FIG. 61, in the reel effect code index column, reel effect code indexes called “REDAT_E02” and “RESEL_E05” from the top are defined in this order. The This is because, when “RESEL_E04” is selected as the reel effect data selection index, the reel effect code defined in “REDAT_E02” and the reel effect code defined in “RESEL_E05” are executed in this order. means.

  In this example, the reel effect data selection index “RESEL_E05” is finally defined (quoted) as the reel effect code index. Therefore, in this case, after the reel effect code specified in “REDAT_E02” is executed, the various reel effect code indexes (“REDAT_E01”, “REDAT_AC”) specified in the reel effect data selection index “RESEL_E05” are executed. And “end code”) are executed.

  That is, when “RESEL_E04” is selected as the reel effect data selection index, the reel effect code specified in “REDAT_E02”, the reel effect code specified in “REDAT_E01”, and the reel effect code specified in “REDAT_AC” The code and the reel effect code defined in the “end code” (reel stop operation) are executed in this order.

  For example, when “RESEL_E03” is selected as the reel effect data selection index (when the reel effect pattern “03” is selected during the “continuous lock state”), “REDAT_E02” is used as the reel effect code index. And “RESEL_E04” are defined (quoted) in this order. Therefore, when “RESEL_E03” is selected as the reel effect data selection index, the reel effect code specified in “REDAT_E02”, the reel effect code specified in “REDAT_E02”, and the reel specified in “REDAT_E01” The effect code, the reel effect code specified in “REDAT_AC”, and the reel effect code specified in “end code” (reel stop operation) are executed in this order.

  In this manner, by defining another reel effect data selection index as a reel effect code index corresponding to a predetermined reel effect data selection index, the reel effect code index specified for one reel effect data selection index The number can be reduced. As a result, in this embodiment, the amount of data related to the reel effect can be reduced.

  Now, in the reel effect code determination table having the configuration shown in FIG. 61, for example, each reel effect code (sub data) corresponding to “REDAT_E02”, “REDAT_E02”, “REDAT_E01”, “REDAT_AC”, and “End code”. Consider a case in which a production execution program (execution data of a predetermined variation pattern) that defines execution data) in this order is created. In this case, a plurality of types of reel effects can be executed by designating a process start code in the effect execution program using the reel effect data selection index.

  More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 61, by specifying the first “REDAT_E02” as the processing start code in the production execution program, the first “REDAT_E02” in the production execution program Each reel effect code up to “END CODE” is sequentially executed, and a reel effect corresponding to the reel effect data selection index “RESEL_E03” can be executed. Further, for example, by specifying the second “REDAT_E02” as the process start code in the above-described effect execution program, each reel effect from the second “REDAT_E02” to “End code” in the effect execution program. The codes are sequentially executed, and the reel effect corresponding to the reel effect data selection index “RESEL_E04” can be executed. Furthermore, for example, by specifying “REDAT_E01” as the process start code in the above-described effect execution program, each reel effect code from “REDAT_E01” to “End code” in the above-described effect execution program is executed in sequence. A reel effect corresponding to the data selection index “RESEL_E05” can be executed.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it is possible to handle a plurality of types of reel effects with a single effect execution program. Therefore, in this embodiment, the amount of data related to the reel effect can be reduced, and the reel effect process can be simplified.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the reel effect is performed during the acceleration process even when the bonus is won. At that time, the reel effect pattern “14” or “15” is selected, and “RESEL_E01” or “RESEL_E02” is selected as the reel effect data selection index (see FIG. 60).

  In the present embodiment, when the reel effect data selection index “RESEL_E01” is selected, as shown in FIG. 61, the reel effect code defined in “REDAT_AC”, the reel effect code defined in “REDAT_E03”, and The reel effect codes defined in “End Code” are executed in this order. As is apparent from a comparison between the reel effect in this case and the reel effect in the reel effect data selection index “RESEL_AC” selected during the normal acceleration process, both of the reel effects are initially defined in “REDAT_AC”. The code is executed.

  Therefore, when the reel effect data selection index “RESEL_E01” is selected at the time of winning the bonus, the reel effect similar to the normal acceleration process is first executed. In this case, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected reel effect by making it appear to the player as a normal acceleration process and then showing the reel effect corresponding to the bonus winning. it can.

  In the example shown in FIG. 61, when another reel effect data selection index is defined as a reel effect code index with respect to a predetermined reel effect data selection index (for example, “RESEL_E04”), one type of other reels Although the example which prescribes | regulates an effect data selection index was demonstrated, this invention is not limited to this. For example, two or more types of other reel effect data selection indexes may be defined as the reel effect code index with respect to a predetermined reel effect data selection index.

[Reel production code table]
Next, the reel effect code table (variation content specifying means) will be described with reference to FIG. The reel effect code table shows the correspondence between each reel effect code index shown in FIG. 61 and information related to the content of the reel effect corresponding to the reel effect code index.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of motor excitation signal patterns (excitation data) related to the reel acceleration conditions and rotation direction at the time of reel production are provided, and the number of executions of each excitation signal pattern and combinations of excitation signal patterns of different types are provided. By changing, various reel production is possible. Therefore, in the reel effect code table shown in FIG. 62, as information relating to the contents of the reel effect, excitation data addresses (“MGDAT_AP”, “MGDAT_WT”, “MGDAT_BR”, etc.) which are information specifying excitation data: a plurality of displays Information specifying the variation content of the column) and production frequency data (information relating to the execution frequency of the variation content) of each excitation data (reel production code) are defined.

  The number-of-effects data defines the number of executions of the corresponding excitation data and information about whether or not an end code (operation end information) is included after the excitation data is executed a prescribed number of times. In addition, when a plurality of excitation data addresses are defined for one reel effect code index, the excitation data (reel effect code) of the excitation data address described at the top in the table shown in FIG. ) Are sequentially performed from the rendering operation.

  For example, in the reel production corresponding to the reel production code index “REDAT_E02”, first, the excitation operation (reel production code) of “MGDAT_WT” is executed 27 times, and then the excitation operation of “MGDAT_BR” is executed 25 times. Next, after performing the excitation operation of “MGDAT_WT” 27 times, the reel effect corresponding to the reel effect data index “REDAT_E02” is ended.

[Excitation data table]
Next, an excitation data table (variation content defining means) will be described with reference to FIG. The excitation data table shows the correspondence between each excitation data address defined in FIG. 62 and various types of information related to the content of the corresponding excitation data (excitation operation).

  In the present embodiment, as information related to the contents of excitation data, excitation direction (reel rotation direction) data, excitation timer value (number of interrupt processing), and presence / absence of an end code are defined. In addition, when information on the contents of a plurality of excitation data (excitation operations) is defined in the excitation data address, the excitation data is sequentially executed from the excitation data described at the top in the table shown in FIG.

  For example, in the excitation operation of the reel with the excitation data address “MGDAT_AP”, first, the operation of rotating the reel in the forward direction (the direction of arrow A in FIG. 22) is repeated twice for the period corresponding to the excitation timer value “5”. Next, the operation of rotating the reel in the forward direction is repeated three times for the period corresponding to the excitation timer value “3”. Note that the period corresponding to the excitation timer value “1” corresponds to a period of one interrupt process, and is 1.1172 msec in this embodiment. Further, this interrupt process performed in the reel effect at the time of the acceleration process is performed in the reel control process of S445 in the flowchart of the interrupt process for the control by the main CPU described later with reference to FIG. In this interrupt process, the excitation timer value is updated (subtracted) and a predetermined operation (forward rotation, reverse rotation, or holding) is performed on the reel until the excitation timer value becomes zero.

  For example, in the excitation operation of the reel with the excitation data address “MGDAT_WT”, the reel is held (stopped) for a period corresponding to the excitation timer value “22”. Further, for example, in the excitation operation of the reel with the excitation data address “MGDAT_BR”, first, the reel is rotated in the forward direction for a period corresponding to the excitation timer value “24”. Next, the reel is rotated in the reverse direction (the direction opposite to the arrow A direction in FIG. 22) for a period corresponding to the excitation timer value “24”.

[Relationship between reel production pattern and acceleration processing time]
As described above, in the present embodiment, during the “continuous lock state” and when a bonus is won, various reel effects are prepared during the acceleration process from the start operation until the reel is driven at a constant speed. Here, FIG. 64 shows the relationship between the value (number) of each reel effect pattern and the time taken for the corresponding acceleration processing.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the content of the effect varies depending on the reel effect pattern. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64, the time required for the acceleration process from the start operation until the reel is driven at a constant speed is also different for each reel effect pattern.

  The time required for the acceleration process is obtained by 1.1172 msec × [192 (specified value) + timer value]. The timer value is obtained with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63, and is a value obtained by adding the excitation timer values of all excitation operations performed in each reel effect pattern. Also, the timer value “192” to be added as the specified value is a timer value related to, for example, a start-up process that is required at a minimum from the start operation to the execution of a predetermined reel effect.

[Map configuration and sub-management state transition flow]
In the present embodiment, as described above, in the “normal state” where the ART does not operate, the lock effect and the effect effect that simultaneously activates the lock effect and the effect by the movable accessory 23 based on the map (map information). Do. Map data and various table data necessary for the lock / function effect production are also stored in the main ROM 52. In addition, this invention is not limited to this, You may make it perform only a lock effect as an effect based on a map.

  Here, a schematic configuration of the map will be described with reference to FIG. The map is information that defines the number of games to be locked from the game after winning a map winning lottery described later. In more detail, as shown in FIG. 65, the map is a predetermined game number N (the number of games staying on the map: the number of map games) from the game (first game) next to the game (unit game) won in the map winning lottery. Presence / absence of lock in each game during the game period up to the game. In FIG. 65, “◯” marks indicate the games that generate the lock. In the example shown in FIG. 65, the lock is performed on the N-2 game from the next game (the first game) of the map win. That is, when the map winning lottery is won in the “normal state” and a map as shown in FIG. 65 is set, a lock is generated at the N-2 game from the next game of the map winning, and in conjunction with this, The object 23 is activated.

  It should be noted that the lock process at the time of the lock / function effect performed in the “normal state” is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means for controlling the lock function (lock control means, lock control unit).

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of types of maps are provided, and one map (map number) is selected from a plurality of types of maps based on the internal winning combination at the time of map winning lottery. As will be described later, the map game number N is determined by lottery processing using a map game number lottery table (see FIG. 74 described later) and a map game number subtraction lottery table (see FIG. 75 described later) after winning the map. Is done. That is, the map game number N is randomly determined by lottery.

  In the present embodiment, in the map winning lottery process in the “normal state”, when a predetermined map is won from a plurality of types of maps, AT (ART) wins. When the AT is determined by winning the predetermined map, the game of the lock / function effect corresponding to the predetermined map (game of the number of map games) is digested, and then the AT (navigation) Be started.

  More specifically, in this embodiment, eight types of maps (Map 0 to Map 7) are prepared as maps. The contents of each map are as follows.

  When the map 0 is selected, the map lottery is not won (lost), and no map is set. In addition, when any of the maps 1 to 3 is won, a game of lock / function effect production based on the map of the production pattern 1 is performed, but AT (ART) is non-winning. Therefore, when any one of the maps 1 to 3 is won, the AT (navigation) is not started after the game of lock / function effect production based on the won map is digested. In other words, the lock / function effect that is executed when any of the maps 1 to 3 is won is a false sign effect (so-called gasse sign effect) of the ART win.

  When the map 4 or 5 is won, after the game of the lock / function effect production based on the map is digested, the game state is changed to a game state called “ART state” (“ART first hit state”) described later. An AT (navigation) that directly shifts is started. If the player wins the map 6 or 7, after the game of the lock / function effect based on the map is digested, the game state is set to “ART” through a game state called “7-set pseudo bonus” which will be described later. The AT is started to shift to a gaming state called “state” (“ART first hit state”).

  That is, if any of the maps 4 to 7 is won in the “normal state”, it becomes an ART win, and after the game of the lock / function effect production based on the map is digested, the game state finally becomes “ AT (navigation) that shifts to the “ART state” is started. Therefore, the lock / combination effect executed when winning any of the maps 4 to 7 is an effect indicating a sign of ART winning.

  Here, the operations from the game of the locks 4 to 7 and the lock / function effect production to the start of AT based on the maps 4 to 7 will be described in more detail. First, the map 4 is a map that is set when an AT (ART) is won by a lottery process of a map in a state where no map is set. Then, when the map 4 is won, the operation of AT (navigation) is started after the game of lock / function effect production based on the map 4 is finished.

  In the map 5, the AT is won by the lottery processing of the map in a state in which any of the maps 1 to 3 has already been set (unit game during the game period of the lock / function effect game based on any of the maps 1 to 3). It is a map set in the case. When the map 5 is won, the information of the map 5 is first held until the game of the lock / function effect production based on any of the maps 1 to 3 is ended (the holding flag described later is turned on). Become). Next, after the game of the lock / community effect based on any one of the maps 1 to 3 is finished, the game of the lock / function product effect based on the map 5 is started. Then, after the game of lock / function effect production based on the map 5 is completed, the operation of the AT (navigation) is started.

  The map 6 is a map that is set when a “seven-matched pseudo bonus” is won by map lottery processing in a state where no map is set. When the map 6 is won, the operation of the AT (navigation) is started after the game of the lock / function effect production based on the map 6 is finished.

  In addition, the map 7 is “7” by lottery processing of the map in a state where any one of the maps 1 to 3 is already set (unit game during the game period of the lock / function effect game based on any of the maps 1 to 3). This map is set when the “matched pseudo bonus” is won. When the map 7 is won, first, information on the map 7 is held until the game of the lock / function effect based on any one of the maps 1 to 3 is ended (the holding flag described later is turned on). Become). Next, after the game of the lock / community effect based on any of the maps 1 to 3 is finished, the game of the lock / function product effect based on the map 7 is started. Then, after the game of lock / function effect production based on the map 7 is finished, the operation of the AT (navigation) is started.

  In this specification, for example, the above-described “normal state”, “ART state” (“ART first hit state”), “seven equal pseudo bonus”, and the like are controlled by the sub control circuit 42 (sub CPU 81). Various game states related to the effect to be played are referred to as “sub game states”. The contents of the game performed in each sub game state will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

  Here, a processing flow related to the map lottery described above will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, in the “normal state”, a map winning lottery (“Map lottery” in FIG. 66) is performed, and when the map is won, a game of a predetermined lock / function effect based on the corresponding winning map ("Map game digestion" in FIG. 66). At this time, in the map winning lottery, when a predetermined map (one of the maps 4 to 7 in this embodiment) is won, the game state shifts to the “ART state” after the map game ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the “normal state”, the probability of winning one of the maps 4 to 7 (ART winning probability) is a low probability (hereinafter referred to as sub-management state 0), and a high probability. A state (hereinafter referred to as sub-management state 1) and a state with a very high probability (hereinafter referred to as sub-management state 2) are provided. Transition between these various sub management states is controlled by lottery processing (“sub management state lottery” in FIG. 66) based on an internal winning combination performed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, the sub management state is changed from “sub management state 0” (low probability state) to “sub management state 1” (high probability state) or “sub probability state” based on the internal winning combination. Transition to “Management state 2” (super high probability state). In the present embodiment, the sub management state is changed from “sub management state 1” (high probability state) or “sub management state 2” (very high probability state) to “sub management state 0” based on the internal winning combination. Transition to (low probability state). However, in the present embodiment, there is no flow for directly changing the sub management state between “sub management state 1” (high probability state) and “sub management state 2” (very high probability state).

  In addition, although not shown in FIG. 66, in this embodiment, lottery processing of the sub management state of the transfer destination is also performed when the sub gaming state shifts from the “ART state” to the “normal state” (at the end of ART). In this case, one of the sub management states 0 to 2 is selected regardless of the internal winning combination.

  In the present embodiment, when the AT is activated, not only the determined internal winning combination is notified to the player, but the player intentionally displays the determined internal winning combination on the winning determination line. Information for making it possible to be notified. In addition, when the AT is activated, the type of the determined internal winning combination, the position where the determined internal winning combination can be displayed within the specified time range, and the determined internal winning combination are displayed in a stop on the winning determination line. Information such as a stop order to be made may be suggested to the player.

[Sub management status transition lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70, various sub management state transition lottery tables used in the sub management state lottery processing described above will be described. The sub-management state transition lottery table is referred to in a later-described sub-management state transition lottery process (see FIG. 109).

  FIG. 67 is an example of a sub management state transition lottery table (part 1) referred to when performing sub management state transition lottery processing in “sub management state 0”. The sub management state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 67 defines lottery values for the sub management states 0 to 2 to be won according to the internal winning combination (data point for small combination / replay).

  In the sub-management state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 67, “common bell” is an internal symbol combination related to “bell” of the small role / replay data pointer “28”. The “chance lip” is an internal winning combination related to the “chance lip” of the small role / replay data pointer “23”. The “weak cherry” is an internal winning combination related to “cherry” of the small role / replay data pointer “48”. The “weak watermelon” is an internal winning combination relating to “watermelon” of the small role / replay data pointer “45”. The “strong cherry” is an internal winning combination relating to “cherry” of the small role / replay data pointer “49”. The “strong watermelon” is an internal winning combination related to the “watermelon” of the small role / replay data pointers “46” and “47”. The “medium cherry” is an internal winning combination related to “cherry” of the small role / replay data pointer “50”.

  In the sub management state transition lottery process, the lottery value of each sub management state defined in the sub management state transition lottery table is subtracted from the random value of 0 to 32767 (random number denominator = 32768), and the subtraction result is less than 0. The sub-management state that has become is determined as the winning sub-management state. Therefore, in the sub management state transition lottery process in the “sub management state 0”, for example, when the internal winning combination is “weak cherry”, the sub management state has the probability of “29160/32768” “sub” The management state becomes 0 (no transition), transitions to “sub management state 1” with a probability of “3280/32768”, and transitions to “sub management state 2” with a probability of “328/32768”.

  FIG. 68 is an example of a sub management state transition lottery table (part 2) referred to when performing sub management state transition lottery processing in “sub management state 1”. The sub management state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 68 defines lottery values as to whether or not the sub management state shifts to “sub management state 0” in accordance with the internal winning combination (data point for small role / replay). . In the sub-management state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 68, “middle right bell” is an internal symbol combination related to “bell” of the small role / replay data pointers “29” to “44”.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, when “middle right bell” is internally won in “sub management state 1”, the sub management state does not shift with the probability of “27668/32768”, and “5100/32768”. The sub management state shifts from “sub management state 1” to “sub management state 0” with a probability of “.

  FIG. 69 is an example of a sub management state transition lottery table (part 3) referred to when performing sub management state transition lottery processing in “sub management state 2”. The sub management state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 69 defines lottery values as to whether or not the sub management state shifts to “sub management state 0” in accordance with the internal winning combination (data point for small role / replay). .

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, when “middle right bell” is internally won in “sub management state 2”, the sub management state does not shift with the probability of “22688/32768”, and “10080/32768”. The sub management state shifts from “sub management state 2” to “sub management state 0” with a probability of “.

  FIG. 70 is an example of a sub management state transition lottery table (part 4) referred to in the sub management state transition lottery process performed when the “ART state” ends and the sub gaming state transitions to the “normal state”. The sub management state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 70 defines lottery values for each sub management state (sub management states 0 to 2) to be won at the end of ART. The sub-management state transition lottery process is also performed when the lottery value setting (settings 1 to 6) in the RT lottery table (see FIGS. 30 to 35) is changed or after resetting. In addition, lottery processing is performed with reference to a sub-management state transition lottery table as shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, when the sub gaming state shifts from the “ART state” to the “normal state”, the sub management state becomes “sub management state 0” with a probability of “27648/32768”. Is set, and the sub-management state 1 is set with a probability of “5120/32768”. In the present embodiment, when the sub gaming state shifts from the “ART state” to the “normal state”, the sub management state is set to “sub management state 2” (a state in which ART wins with a very high probability). Not.

[Map winning lottery table]
Next, various map winning lottery tables used in the above-described map lottery processing (AT lottery processing) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 71 is an example of a map winning lottery table (part 1) referred to when map lottery processing is performed in the “sub-management state 0”. FIG. 72 is an example of a map winning lottery table (part 2) that is referred to when map lottery processing is performed in “sub-management state 1”. FIG. 73 is an example of a map winning lottery table (part 3) referred to when map lottery processing is performed in the “sub-management state 2”. Each map winning lottery table is referred to in a map winning lottery process (see FIG. 111) described later.

  Each map winning lottery table defines an effect pattern (map: lock effect pattern) to be won and its lottery value in accordance with an internal winning combination (data point for small combination / replay). In addition, the type of map to be won is described in the lower part of each column of each effect pattern in each map winning lottery table, and the lottery value is described in the upper part. In each map winning lottery table, a lottery value when not winning a map lottery (when not winning: when winning map 0) is partially defined. In each sub-management state transition lottery table shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, “determined combination” is an internal winning combination related to “determined combination” of the small combination / replay data pointer “51”.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, when any one of maps 1 to 3 wins, the ART winning sign effect pattern (gase sign effect) of “effect pattern 1” is performed. When the map 4 or 5 is won, the ART winning sign effect pattern (“AT winning sign effect”) of the “effect pattern 2” is performed, and the ART winning sign effect pattern of the “effect pattern 3” (seven simulated falses) is performed. Bonus winning sign).

  In the map winning lottery process, the lottery value of each effect pattern defined in the map winning lottery table is subtracted from the random value of 0 to 32767 (random number denominator = 32768), and the effect pattern ( The winning pattern (map) is the winning map. Therefore, in the map winning lottery process in the “sub-management state 0”, for example, when the internal winning combination is “chance lip”, the map 1 wins with the probability of “32576/32768” and “128/32768” The map 4 or 5 wins with the probability of “64” and the map 6 or 7 wins with the probability of “64/32768” (see FIG. 71). That is, in the map winning lottery process in the “sub-management state 0”, for example, if the internal winning combination is “chance lip”, the false winning effect (lock / combination of ART winning) with the probability of “32576/32768”. The effect presentation is executed with a probability of “128/32768”, and the precursor effect of “7-matched pseudo bonus” is executed with the probability of “64/32768”.

  Further, in the map winning lottery process in the “sub-management state 1”, for example, when the internal winning combination is “chance lip”, the map 2 wins with the probability of “29424/32768” and “3280/32768”. The map 4 or 5 wins with the probability of 64, and the map 6 or 7 wins with the probability of “64/32768” (see FIG. 72). Further, in the map winning lottery process in the “sub-management state 2”, for example, when the internal winning combination is “chance lip”, the map 4 or 5 wins with the probability of “32704/32768” and “64 / Map 6 or 7 is won with a probability of “32768” (see FIG. 73).

[Map game number lottery table]
Next, a map game number lottery table used when determining the number of map games will be described with reference to FIG. The map game number lottery table is referred to in a map game number lottery process (see FIG. 112) described later.

  The map game number lottery table is determined based on any one of the maps 1 to 7 determined by the map winning lottery process (reference value of the number of staying games in the map: reference unit number of games in the lock effect pattern). ) Is specified. In the present embodiment, as the map reference game number, 12 map reference game numbers of 0G (game), 3G, 4G, 5G, 6G, 7G, 8G, 16G, 18G, 32G, 34G, and 48G are used. It is specified in the table.

  In the map game number lottery process, the lottery value of each map reference game number specified in the map game number lottery table is subtracted from a random value of 0 to 255 (random denominator = 256), and the subtraction result becomes less than 0. The number of map base games won is the winning map base game number. Therefore, for example, if map 1 is won by the map winning lottery process, it wins the 3G map base game number with a probability of “4/256” and becomes the 4G map base game number with a probability of “169/256”. Win a 5G map base game number with a probability of “56/256”, win a 6G map base game number with a probability of “24/256”, and win a 7G map with a probability of “2/256” Win the reference game number and win the 16G map reference game number with a probability of “1/256”.

[Map game number subtraction lottery table]
Next, a map game number subtraction table used when determining the number of map games will be described with reference to FIG. The map game number subtraction lottery table is referred to in a map game number lottery process (see FIG. 112) described later.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a map reference game number of 16G (predetermined number) or more is selected in the map game number lottery process, the number of games in the range from 0G to 4G from the map reference game number. Is subtracted. The map game number subtraction lottery table shown in FIG. 75 defines the lottery value of each subtraction value (0 to −4) at the time of the process.

  In the map game number subtraction lottery process, the lottery value of each subtraction value defined in the map game number subtraction lottery table is subtracted from a random value of 0 to 255 (random number denominator = 256), and the subtraction result is less than 0. The subtracted value becomes the subtracted value of the number of map games won. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 75, any subtraction value of “0” to “−3” wins with a probability of “51/256”, and “−4” with a probability of “52/256”. The subtraction value of wins.

  Here, FIG. 76 shows a correspondence table representing the relationship between the number of map games (the number of staying games on the map) finally determined based on the result of the map game number subtraction lottery process of the present embodiment and the subtraction value. For example, when the map reference game number selected by the map game number lottery process is “18G”, the map game number (the number of precursor games) finally determined by the result of the map game number subtraction lottery process is “18G”. ”To“ 14G ”. If the map reference game number selected by the map game number lottery process is less than 16G, the map reference game number selected by the map game number lottery process becomes the final map game number.

[Lottery table for locks / functions]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 83, the lock / function type lottery table will be described. Note that the lock / combination type lottery table is referred to in a lock setting process after third stop (see FIG. 113) described later.

  In this embodiment, based on the type of the sub management state and the map number of the winning map, the generation (operation) timing of the lock (game mark in FIG. 65) The number of games: lock / function type) is determined. That is, each lock / combination type lottery table shown in FIGS. 77 to 83 is a lottery table that is referred to at the time of determining the occurrence timing of the lock (the operation (drive) timing of the movable accessory 23).

  Specifically, FIG. 77 is a lock / function type lottery table used when winning map 1 during “sub-management state 0” or “sub-management state 2”, and FIG. 78 shows “sub-management state” FIG. 79 is a lock / function type lottery table used when winning the map 2 during “0” or “sub-management state 2”. FIG. 79 shows the “sub-management state 0” or “sub-management state 2”. It is a lock / function type lottery table used when winning a map 3. FIG. 80 is a lock / function type lottery table used when winning map 1 during “sub-management state 1”, and FIG. 81 winning map 2 during “sub-management state 1”. FIG. 82 is a lock / function type lottery table used when winning a map 3 during the “sub-management state 1”. FIG. 83 is a lock / function type lottery table used when any of the maps 4 to 7 is won regardless of the sub-management state.

  Each lock / combination type lottery table defines lottery values of the lock / combination type to be won according to the number of lock setting reference games. Note that the lock setting reference game number in the lock / combination type lottery table is obtained from the final map game number determined by the map game number lottery process and the map game number subtraction lottery process. Specifically, when the determined number of map games is 34G or less, the number of map games is set as the lock setting reference game number. On the other hand, when the determined number of map games is 35G or more, the number of games (any one of 29G, 30G, 31G, and 32G) obtained by subtracting any of 0G to 3G from 32G is set as the lock setting reference game number. . At this time, the number of subtraction games (any of 0G to 3G) is determined by lottery, and although not shown in the present embodiment, the lottery value (winning probability) of each subtraction game number is the same.

  The various lock / combination types described in the lock / combination type lottery table have different timings (number of games) for generating a lock (operating the movable accessory 23). For example, in the present embodiment, the contents of each lock and accessory type can be set as follows. In the lock / commodity type “1”, the lock setting is performed after the third stop in the game 2G before the game of the lock setting reference number of games. In the lock / commodity type “2”, the lock setting is performed after the third stop in the game 3G before the game of the lock setting reference number of games. In the lock / commodity type “3”, the lock setting is performed after the third stop in the game 4G before the game of the lock setting reference number of games. In the lock / community type “4”, the lock setting is performed after the third stop in the game 5G before the game of the lock setting reference game number.

  If the lock / function type is set as described above, the lock / function type “1” is selected, and the lock setting reference game number is 5G (= number of map games), the lock based on the map The lock setting is performed after the third stop of the third game from the start of the game of the effect production, and the lock operation and the movable accessory 23 are performed in the fourth game. Note that the type of the movable accessory 23 that is driven by each lock and accessory type may be different for each lock and accessory type, or may be the same.

  In the lottery processing for the lock / combination type, the various lottery values defined in the lock / combination lottery table are subtracted from the random value of 0 to 255 (random number denominator = 256), and the subtraction result is 0. The type that is less than the number will be the winning lock / function type. Therefore, for example, when winning the map 1 during the “sub-management state 0” or “sub-management state 2” and the lock setting reference game number is 4G or more, as shown in FIG. The lock / function type “1” is selected with a probability of “252/256”, and the lock / function type “2” is selected with a probability of “4/256”. Also, for example, in the case where one of the maps 4 to 7 is won and the lock setting reference game number is 5G, the lock / function type “1” or “3” has a probability of “48/256”. Is selected, and the lock / function type “2” is selected with a probability of “160/256”.

<Configuration of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, although explanation is omitted (not shown), various effect random numbers, various control data, various flags, used in effect control of reels and locks in the “continuous lock state (chance zone)” described later, Storage areas such as various counters (for example, an effect random value storage area, an effect flag number storage area described later) are also provided in the main RAM 53. Furthermore, in this embodiment, even in the “normal state” (non-ART state), the lock and the accessory effect are performed based on the map. Various random values, various control data, various flags, various counters used at the time of this operation control are performed. A storage area such as is also provided in the main RAM 53.

[Display combination storage area]
First, the structure of the display combination storing area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the display combination storage area includes display combination storage areas 1 to 25 each represented by 1-byte data.

  In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 25, when “1” stands for a predetermined bit (when stored), a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the winning determination line. It shows that. On the other hand, when all the bits are “0”, it indicates that the symbol combination related to winning or the symbol combination related to the operation of the bonus game is not displayed on the winning determination line.

  The main RAM 53 is provided with an internal winning combination storing area and a carryover combination storing area (not shown). The internal winning combination storing area includes storage areas 1 to 22 of the display winning combination storing area shown in FIG. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 22, when “1” stands for a plurality of bits, display of a combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. When all the bits are “0”, the content of the internal winning combination is “lost”.

  Further, the carryover combination storage area is composed of the storage area 1 of the display combination storage area shown in FIG. As a result of the internal lottery, when one of “BB1” and “BB2” is determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is stored as a carryover combination in the carryover combination storage area. Specifically, data “1” is stored in a bit corresponding to one of “BB1” and “BB2”. The data of the carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is cleared until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, “Friday 7”-“Friday 7”-“Friday 7”) is displayed on the winning determination line. It is kept without being. In addition, while the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area (while the flag is set: between the flags), in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery, the carryover combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area. Stored.

[Game state flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming state flag storage area stores a gaming state flag consisting of 1 byte. In the present embodiment, a bonus game and an RT type are assigned to each bit in the game state flag.

  When “1” is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area, it indicates that the bonus game corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. For example, when “1” is set in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area, the operation of “BB” is performed and the game state is BB.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

  For example, if the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has been pressed this time, that is, an operation stop button, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Also, for example, if the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, “1” is stored in bit 4. Based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area, the main CPU 51 identifies the stop button that has been pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed.

[Push order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The pressing order storage area stores a pressing order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, the type of stop button pressing order is assigned to each bit. For example, when the pressing order of the stop button is “left middle right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the symbol code storage area, for each winning determination line, the symbol code (symbol code storage region 1) of the symbol of the reel that has been stopped most recently and the roles that can be displayed (symbol code storage regions 2 to 26) are stored. Is done. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol codes corresponding to the display combination are stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 26.

  In this embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 56), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is ANDed with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. The ANDed data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. When a plurality of winning determination lines (valid lines) are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of winning determination lines is provided.

[Retrieve priority data storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pull-in priority data storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority data storage area includes a left reel pull-in priority data storage area, a middle reel pull-in priority data storage area, and a right reel pull-in priority data storage area. That is, in the pull-in priority data storage area, a priority data storage area is provided for each reel type.

  Each drawing priority data storage area stores drawing priority data determined in accordance with each symbol position “0” to “20” of the corresponding reel. In the present embodiment, by referring to the pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding symbols in addition to the number of sliding symbols determined based on the stop table described above.

  The contents of the priority order pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority order data storage area differ depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 53) referred to when determining the pull-in priority order data. . The pull-in priority data indicates that the higher the value, the higher the priority. On the other hand, the pull-in priority data with the lowest priority is prohibited from being stopped.

  By referring to the drawing priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the pull-in priority data becomes the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the rank between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined by the above-described search order table (see FIG. 54).

<Configuration of data table stored in sub-ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the sub ROM 82 will be described.

[Pseudo bonus medium point lottery table]
First, the pseudo bonus medium point lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The pseudo bonus mid-point lottery table is a pseudo bonus mid-point (“0” to “6”) that can be acquired in accordance with an internal winning combination (small role / replay data point) during the operation of “7-set pseudo bonus” described later. Any one)).

  In the pseudo bonus medium point lottery table shown in FIG. 90, “Replay B” is a replay other than the internal winning combination related to the replay of the small role / replay data pointers “23”, “24” and “26”. All internal winning roles related to. “BAR Lip” is an internal winning combination related to the replay of the small role / replay data pointer “24”. “7 Lip” is an internal winning combination related to replay of the small role / replay data pointer “26”.

  In the present embodiment, during the 7-set pseudo bonus mid-processing described later (see FIG. 142), the pseudo-bonus mid-point lottery table is referenced with reference to the pseudo-bonus mid-point lottery table (random value = 0 to 32767, random denominator = 32768). )I do. At this time, for example, if the internal winning combination is “common bell”, the pseudo bonus medium point “1” or “3” is acquired with the probability of “8192/32768”, and the probability of “16384/32768” The pseudo bonus medium point “0” is acquired.

[Pseudo bonus medium top lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the pseudo bonus medium addition lottery table will be described. The extra bonus medium lottery table shows the number of ART games (0, 10, 20, 30) that can be added in accordance with the internal winning combination (small role / replay data point) during the operation of “7-set pseudo bonus” described later. And a lottery value of 50).

  In the present embodiment, during the 7-set pseudo bonus mid-process (to be described later) (see FIG. 142), a lottery process for the number of added games with reference to the pseudo bonus mid-point lottery table (random value = 0-32767, random denominator = 32768). I do. At this time, for example, if the internal winning combination is “chance lip”, the winning game number “10” is won with a probability of “30720/32768”, and the additional game number “10” with a probability of “1024/32768”. Win 20 ”or“ 30 ”.

[Lottery table at the end of the pseudo bonus]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the pseudo bonus end lottery table will be described. The lottery table at the end of the pseudo bonus indicates the number of ART games that can be added according to the obtained pseudo bonus midpoint (any one of 0 to 6) when the later-described “7-set pseudo bonus” is finished. 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 and 100) are determined.

  In the present embodiment, lottery processing (addition lottery) of the number of added games is performed with reference to the lottery table at the end of the pseudo bonus at the time of the seven-set pseudo bonus middle processing (see FIG. 142) described later. At this time, for example, if the point in the pseudo bonus is “6”, the added game number “100” is always won.

[Addition flag lottery table]
Next, the extra flag lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, three types (“mode 1” to “mode 3”) of addition flag lottery (ART continuous lottery) performed in an “ART state” (RT3 gaming state) described later are prepared. In each of the “mode 1” to “mode 3”, the extra flag lottery table shows whether the “addition flag” (ART continuation) is won or not according to the internal winning combination (data point for small role / replay). Specify the lottery value.

  Here, the addition flag lottery mode will be described while explaining the outline of the transition flow of the sub game state between the “normal state” (ART inactive state) and the “ART state” in the present embodiment. The details of the transition flow of the sub gaming state will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, as a route for shifting the sub gaming state from the “normal state” to the “ART first hit state” described later, a route for directly changing from the “normal state” to the “ART first hit state” ( Route 1) and a route (route 2) for shifting from the “normal state” to the “ART first hit state” via a “7-set pseudo bonus” described later are provided. In the present embodiment, after the sub gaming state shifts from the “normal state” to the “ART first hit state” by either one of the routes 1 and 2, an additional flag lottery (continuation of ART) is performed in the “ART first hit state”. Lottery). Further, when “addition flag win” is determined in the addition flag lottery during “ART first hit state”, the sub gaming state is changed from “ART first hit state” to “ART high continuation state” (“ART state”). "ART state in which the continuation probability of" is higher). Even in the “ART high continuation state”, the “ART state” additional flag lottery is performed.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the mode of the extra flag lottery in the “ART first hit state” performed after the sub gaming state shifts to “ART first hit state” via the route 1 is referred to as “mode 1” here. Call it. On the other hand, the mode of the extra flag lottery in the “ART first hit state” performed after the sub gaming state shifts to “ART first hit state” via the route 2 is referred to as “mode 2” here. In addition, the mode of the extra flag lottery performed in the “ART high continuation state” is referred to as “mode 3”.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in each mode, the probability (lottery) of “addition flag winning” varies depending on the internal winning combination (small combination / replay data point). In the present embodiment, the probability of “addition flag winning” in “mode 2” (ART state continuation probability) is higher than that of “mode 1”, and the “addition flag winning” in “mode 3” The lottery value is set so that the probability (continuation probability of the ART state) is higher than that of “mode 2”.

  In the example of the extra flag lottery table shown in FIG. 93, when the number of games in the ART state is “40”, the continuation probability of the ART state in “Mode 1” is 33%, and the continuation probability of the ART state in “Mode 2”. Is 50%, and the continuation probability of the ART state in “mode 3” is 83%. These continuation probabilities are obtained by adding the number of games “40” to the expected value per game for which “addition flag winning” is determined.

[Additional game number lottery table]
Next, the added game number lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. The added game number lottery table indicates the number of ART games (0, 10, 20, 30, 50) that can be added according to the internal winning combination (data point for small role / replay) during the “ART state” (RT3 gaming state). , 70, 90 and 100).

  The added game number lottery table (part 1) shown in FIG. 94 is an extra game lottery process during ART that is performed after the ART continuation (addition flag) is determined in the mode 2 or 3 ART continuous lottery (addition flag lottery). It is a lottery table used in S545) in FIG. The added game number lottery table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 95 is a lottery table used in the extra game lottery processing during ART, which is performed after the ART continuation is determined in the mode 1 ART continuous lottery. In addition game number lottery tables shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, “Replay C” relates to replays other than the internal winning combination related to the replay of the small role / replay data pointers “23” and “26”. All internal winning roles.

  In the extra game lottery processing (random value = 0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768) using the extra game number lottery table shown in FIG. 94, for example, when the internal winning combination is “weak watermelon”, “24576” The winning game number “10” is won with the probability of “/ 32768”, and the additional game number “50” or “70” is won with the probability of “4096/32768”. On the other hand, in the extra game lottery process (random number = 0 to 32767, random denominator = 32768) using the extra game number lottery table shown in FIG. 95, for example, when the internal winning combination is “weak watermelon” The winning game number “10” is won with the probability of “16384/32768”, and the additional game number “50” or “70” is won with the probability of “8192/32768”.

  In the present embodiment, the condition for adding the number of ART games when the ART continuation is determined in the mode 1 ART continuation lottery (low continuation probability lottery) is the ART 2 or 3 ART continuation lottery (high continuation probability lottery). It is preferential over that when ART continuation is confirmed. Specifically, as is clear from a comparison between FIG. 94 and FIG. 95, even if the same internal winning combination, it is possible to add when the ART continuation is determined by the mode 1 ART continuation lottery (low continuation probability lottery) The number of correct games and / or the winning probability of extra lottery will be higher than those in mode 2 or 3.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is “common bell”, in mode 1 (FIG. 95), the number of additional games that can be won is “50” or “70”, whereas mode 2 or 3 (FIG. 94). The number of additional games that can be won is only “30”. That is, when the internal winning combination is “common bell”, the number of games that can be added in mode 1 increases.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is “weak watermelon”, the number of additional games that can be won is any one of “10”, “50”, and “70” in any of modes 1 to 3 as described above. become. However, in mode 1 (FIG. 95), the probability (8192/32768) of winning the added game number “50” or “70” is twice that of mode 2 or 3 (FIG. 94) (4096/32768). It becomes. That is, in mode 1, the probability of winning the number of additional games “50” or “70” increases, and the number of ART games is easily increased.

  In the present embodiment, the number of games that can be added and / or the winning probability of the added lottery have been described as an example of the preferential conditions for the additional lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the lottery for the number of ART games in the ART 1 continuous lottery is more advantageous than that for the mode 2 or 3 continuous lottery (which makes it easier to increase the number of ART games), the random lottery can be added to any conditions. It can be used as a preferential condition.

[Navigation table]
Next, the navigation table will be described with reference to FIG. The navigation table defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations (small role / replay data pointer) and the presence or absence of navigation (notification) in each sub gaming state.

  In the navigation table shown in FIG. 96, “RT1 Lip” is an internal winning combination related to “RT1 Lip” of the small role / replay data pointers “2” to “5”. “RT2-3 Lip” is an internal winning combination related to “RT2 Lip” and “RT3 Lip” of the small role / replay data pointers “6” to “10”. “RT2 Lip” is an internal symbol combination related to “RT2 Lip” of the small role / replay data pointers “11” to “22”. “BAR (Tempai) Lip” is an internal winning combination related to “BAR Lip” of the data pointers “26” and “27” for the small role / replay.

  In addition, when a combination of the sub game state in which “◯” in FIG. 96 is defined and the internal winning combination is established, a predetermined navigation (notification) is performed, and in a combination in which “−” is defined, the navigation is performed. Do not do.

  Specifically, in the combination of the sub game state in which “◯” in FIG. 96 is defined and the internal winning combination, predetermined navigation is performed so that the player is advantageous. In addition, in the combination of “7-matched pseudo bonus” and “BAR (Tempai) Lip” defined as “○ (reverse pressing)”, the symbol combination related to “BAR Lip” is aligned on the winning determination line ( In order to make it appear, the player pushes the reverse press (the order of pressing “right middle left”) to the player. On the other hand, in the combination of “ART first hit state” or “ART high continuation state” and “BAR (Tempai) Lip” with “○ (forward press)” specified, the combination of symbols related to “BAR Lip” is awarded In order to prevent them from being aligned on the judgment line, the player pushes forward pushes (the push order of “left middle right”) to the player.

  In addition, in the combination of “7-set pseudo bonus preparation state” and “RT Lip 2” in which “○ (RT4)” in FIG. RT4 game in which an RT winning state wins an internal winning combination related to “7 lips” with a high probability so that a combination of symbols related to Predetermined navigation (notification) for shifting to the state is performed. Then, in order to start ART in the combination of “preparation state of ART first hit state” or “preparation state of ART high continuation state” and “RT2 lip” defined by “◯ (RT3)” In addition, a predetermined navigation is performed for the RT gaming state to shift to the RT3 gaming state.

<Game state transition flow>
[Transition flow of main game state]
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, six types of game states “RT0 game state” to “RT5 game state” are provided as RT game states. Then, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 28) and controls the transition between “RT0 gaming state” to “RT5 gaming state” and “BB gaming state”. Here, with reference to FIG. 97, the transition flow of the main gaming state between “RT0 gaming state” to “RT5 gaming state” and “BB gaming state” controlled by the main CPU 51 will be described.

  First, at the time of shipment or at the end of “BB”, the main gaming state becomes “RT0 gaming state”. Next, in the “RT0 gaming state”, when a combination of symbols related to “Bell spill” (any one of “Bell spill 1” to “Bell spill 20” in FIG. 26) is displayed on the winning determination line. The main gaming state shifts from “RT0 gaming state” to “RT1 gaming state”.

  In the “RT1 gaming state”, when a combination of symbols related to “RT2 Lip” (any one of “RT2 Lip 1” to “RT2 Lip 4” in FIG. 24) is displayed on the winning determination line, The gaming state shifts from “RT1 gaming state” to “RT2 gaming state”.

  In “RT2 gaming state”, “bell spill” or “RT1 lip” (“RT1 lip upper stage 1” to “RT1 lip upper stage 8”, “RT1 lip lower stage 1” to “RT1 lip lower stage 16” in FIG. 24) , “RT1 lip middle stage 1” and “RT1 lip middle stage 2”) are displayed on the winning determination line, the main gaming state changes from “RT2 gaming state” to “RT1 gaming”. Transition to "state". In the “RT2 gaming state”, when a combination of symbols related to “RT3 lip” (“RT3 lip 1” or “RT3 lip 2” in FIG. 24) is displayed on the winning determination line, the main game The state shifts from “RT2 gaming state” to “RT3 gaming state”. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols related to “RT4 Lip” (any one of “RT4 Lip 1” to “RT4 Lip 8” in FIG. 24) is displayed on the winning determination line in “RT2 gaming state”. The main gaming state shifts from “RT2 gaming state” to “RT4 gaming state”.

  In the “RT3 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “Bell spill” or “RT1 lip” is displayed on the winning determination line, the main gaming state is changed from “RT3 gaming state” to “RT1 gaming state”. Transition to "state".

  In “RT4 gaming state”, a symbol related to “7 Lip” (any one of “7 Lip middle stage 1” to “7 Lip middle stage 10” and “7 Lip CU1” to “7 Lip CU6” in FIG. 23). Is displayed on the winning determination line, the main gaming state shifts from the “RT4 gaming state” to the “RT3 gaming state”. Further, in the “RT4 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “Bell spill” is displayed on the winning determination line, the main gaming state shifts from “RT4 gaming state” to “RT1 gaming state”. . That is, in the “RT0 gaming state” and “RT2 gaming state” to “RT4 gaming state”, when the combination of symbols related to “Bell spill” is displayed on the winning determination line, the main gaming state is “RT1 gaming state”. Transition to "state".

  Further, in this embodiment, when “BB” (“BB1” or “BB2”) is internally won in any of the main gaming states from “RT0 gaming state” to “RT4 gaming state”, the main gaming state is: A transition is made from any of “RT0 gaming state” to “RT4 gaming state” to “RT5 gaming state”.

  In the “RT5 gaming state”, when a combination of symbols related to “BB” (“BB1” or “BB2” in FIG. 23) is displayed on the winning determination line, the main gaming state is “BB gaming state”. "become. When the operation of “BB” is finished, the main gaming state transitions from “BB gaming state” to “RT0 gaming state”.

[Sub game state transition flow]
As described above, the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment has an ART function. In the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 (sub CPU 81) has a sub gaming state in which the ART function (navigation) operates (hereinafter referred to as “ART state”) and a sub gaming state in which the ART function does not operate (hereinafter referred to as “art state”). The transition control of the sub gaming state is performed between the “normal state” and the “normal state”. Here, the transition control of the sub gaming state performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, as the “ART state”, the “ART state” (hereinafter referred to as “ART first hit state”) when the ART is operated for the first time, and the ART is highly probable. Two types of “ART state” to be continued (hereinafter referred to as “ART high continuation state”) are provided. In this embodiment, between the “normal state” and the “ART state” (“ART first hit state” or “ART high continuation state”), the sub game state is changed in the following four routes (routes 1 to 4). Transition.

(1) Route 1
The route 1 is a route for directly changing the sub gaming state between the “normal state” and the “ART state” (“ART first hit state” or “ART high continuation state”). The “normal state” of the sub gaming state corresponds to the “RT0 gaming state (at shipping)” or the “RT1 gaming state” of the main gaming state, and the “ART state” corresponds to the “RT3 gaming state”.

  In the route 1, in the “normal state”, the map winning lottery wins the map 4 or 5 to determine “AT winning”, and then the symbol combination related to “RT3 Lip” is displayed on the winning determination line. In this case, the sub gaming state shifts from the “normal state” to the “ART first hit state”. The sub gaming state from when the AT lottery is won until the symbol combination related to “RT3 Lip” is displayed is referred to as “ART initial hit state ready state”. This “ART initial hit state ready state” is the main game state transition flow (see FIG. 97), and the main game state changes from “RT1 game state” to “RT3 game state” via “RT2 game state”. This corresponds to the state until the transition (see FIG. 99).

  Further, in the route 1, when the ART is finished without completing the ART continuous lottery (addition flag lottery) in the “ART first hit state”, the sub gaming state is changed from “ART first hit state” to “normal” Transition to "state". Furthermore, in the route 1, when the ART setting is completed without winning the ART continuous lottery (addition flag lottery) in the “ART high continuation state”, the sub gaming state is changed from “ART high continuation state” to “normal”. Transition to "state". In this embodiment, there is no route for the sub gaming state to shift directly from the “normal state” to the “ART high continuation state”.

(2) Route 2
In the route 2, the sub game state is changed from the “normal state” to the “ART state” (“ART first hit state” (first state) via the sub game state (specific game state) called “7-set pseudo bonus”. Gaming state) or “ART high continuation state” (second gaming state)). Note that in the “7-matched pseudo bonus”, a predetermined number of games (50 games in the present embodiment) are played in an RT3 gaming state in which an internal winning combination related to replaying (replay) is won with high probability. In addition, in the “7-set pseudo bonus”, the number of ART games is added and lottery is performed for each game and at the end of the game.

  In the route 2, first, in the “normal state”, the map 6 or 7 is won by the map winning lottery, and the “7-match pseudo bonus” is won, and “7 Lip” (“7 Lip Middle Stage 1” in FIG. When the combination of symbols relating to “7 lip middle stage 10” and “7 lip CU1” to “7 lip CU6”) is displayed on the winning determination line, the sub game state is “normal state”. To “7-set pseudo bonus”. The sub game state from when the “7-matched pseudo bonus” is won until the symbol combination related to “7 lip” is displayed is referred to as a “7-matched pseudo bonus preparation state”. The “7 ready pseudo bonus preparation state” is the main game state transition flow (see FIG. 97), in which the main game state changes from “RT1 game state” to “RT2 game state” and “RT4 game state” in this order. This corresponds to the state up to the transition to “RT3 gaming state” (see FIG. 99).

  Next, after the predetermined number of games (50 games) have been consumed in the “7-matched pseudo bonus” (after the “7-matched pseudo bonus” has ended), the sub-game state is changed from “7-matched pseudo bonus” to “ART first It shifts to a “win state”.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the number of games added by the extra lottery in the “7-matched pseudo bonus” reaches the specified number of games (the specified number of times: 100 games in the present embodiment), after the “7-matched pseudo bonus” ends. In the “ART state” that has been transferred, a game of extra lottery with a specified number of games is performed without playing an “ART first hit state” game with a low winning flag winning probability (ART continuation probability). Then, after the game of the lottery with the prescribed number of games is completed, the state shifts to the “ART high continuation state”. That is, when the number of games added by the extra lottery in the “7-matched pseudo bonus” reaches the prescribed number of games (100 games in this embodiment), the sub game state “ART high continuation state” The transition to is confirmed.

  In this embodiment, when the value of the ART game number counter at the end of the “7-matched pseudo bonus” is equal to or greater than the specified value, the sub game state is set to “7-matched simulated without performing the lottery game by adding the specified number of games. You may make it transfer to "ART high continuation state" directly from "bonus". In this case, the specified number of games added by the “seven set pseudo bonus” may be added to the number of games of the first set of “ART high continuation state”.

(3) Route 3
The route 3 is a route in which the sub game state shifts from the “normal state” to the “ART state” (“ART high continuation state”) via a sub game state called “chance zone”. The “chance zone” corresponds to the “RT1 gaming state” of the main gaming state. In the “chance zone”, one or more reel effects and locks are performed during a unit game, and such a unit game is continuously performed within a predetermined maximum number of unit games. Therefore, in this embodiment, the “chance zone” is also referred to as “continuous lock state”.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum duration of the “continuous lock state” is 10 games. Further, in the present embodiment, the reel production and the lock are always performed during the predetermined game (the number of guaranteed games in the “continuous lock state”) from the start of the “continuous lock state” (the “continuous lock state” is maintained), In subsequent games, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to continue the “continuous lock state” for each game. Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of guaranteed games in the “continuous lock state” is three games. In the “continuous lock state”, whether or not the “continuous lock state” is continued for each game after the fourth game. Do lottery. Further, in the “continuous lock state”, a reel effect (reel action) and a lock corresponding to the winning reel effect pattern are performed, and a count subtraction value corresponding to the winning reel effect pattern (main book) from the value of the continuous lock state counter. In the embodiment, an operation of subtracting “1” to “3”) is also performed. The operation control in the “continuous lock state” will be described in more detail in the operation flow described later.

  In the route 3, when the lottery for the continuous lock state transition is won in the “normal state” (“10” is stored in the continuous lock state counter), the sub gaming state is changed from the “normal state” to the “chance zone” ( (Continuous lock state). Next, when a specified point (predetermined count subtraction value) is acquired in the “chance zone” (the sum of the count subtraction values acquired in the “chance zone” is “10”, and the value of the continuous lock state counter is “ When it becomes “0”), the sub gaming state shifts from the “chance zone” to the “ART high continuation state”. The sub game state from the end of the “chance zone” to the transition to the “ART high continuation state” is referred to as an “ART high continuation state preparation state”. This “ART high continuation state ready state” is the main gaming state transition flow (see FIG. 97), the main gaming state changes from “RT1 gaming state” to “RT3 gaming state” via “RT2 gaming state”. This corresponds to the state until the transition (see FIG. 99).

  Also, in Route 3, in the “chance zone”, when the specified point (count subtraction value “10”) cannot be obtained, that is, when the “continuous lock state” is not determined. The sub gaming state shifts from the “chance zone” to the “normal state”.

(4) Route 4
The route 4 is a route in which the sub game state shifts from the “normal state” to the “ART state” (“ART high continuation state”) via the sub game state called “premium bonus”. “Premium bonus” corresponds to “BB gaming state” of the main gaming state.

  In the route 4, first, “BB” (“BB1” and “BB2”) is won internally in the “normal state”, and then the symbol related to “BB” (“BB1” or “BB2” in FIG. 7). When the combination is displayed on the winning determination line, the sub gaming state shifts from the “normal state” to the “premium bonus”. Note that the sub gaming state from when “BB” is won until the symbol combination related to “BB” is displayed is referred to as “premium bonus preparation state”. This “premium bonus preparation state” is the main game state transition flow (see FIG. 97), and the main game state passes from “RT1 game state” to “RT4 game state” via “RT5 game state”. This corresponds to the state until the transition to the “BB gaming state” (see FIGS. 97 and 99).

  Next, in “Premium Bonus”, after “BB” is digested and finished, the combination of symbols related to “RT3 Lip” (“RT3 Lip 1” or “RT3 Lip 2” in FIG. 24) is on the winning judgment line. Is displayed, the sub gaming state shifts from “Premium Bonus” to “ART High Continuation State”. The sub gaming state from the end of “BB” to the display of the symbol combination related to “RT3 Lip” is also referred to as “ART high-continuation state preparation state”. The “ART high continuation state ready state” is the main game state transition flow (see FIG. 97). The main game state is changed from “BB game state” to “RT0 game state”, “RT1 game state”, and “RT2 game”. It corresponds to the state up to the transition to “RT3 gaming state” via “state” in this order (see FIG. 99).

[Transition during ART state and extra flag lottery]
In the present embodiment, as described above, the “ART initial hit state” and the “ART high continuation state” are provided as the “ART state”. Here, the transition condition between the “ART initial hit state” and the “ART high continuation state”, and the addition flag lottery (ART continuous lottery) performed in each state will be described. Note that both the “ART initial hit state” and the “ART high continuation state” in the sub gaming state correspond to the “RT3 gaming state” in the main gaming state. In the “ART state”, information such as the reel stop order is navigated (notified) to the player based on the navigation table described with reference to FIG. 96 so that the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, when the extra flag lottery is won in the “ART first hit state”, the sub gaming state is changed from the “ART first hit state” to the “ART high continuation state” after the “ART first hit state” ends. ”. In the “ART high continuation state”, if the winning flag lottery is won, the “ART high continuation state” is continued. If the winning flag lottery is not won, the sub gaming state is “ART high continuation state”. Transition from "state" to "normal state" (see route 1 above).

  93, as described with reference to the addition flag lottery table in FIG. 93, when the sub gaming state shifts to “ART first hit state” on route 2 (“mode 2” addition flag lottery), the winning probability of the addition flag ( The ART continuation probability) is set to be higher than that in the case of shifting to the “ART first hit state” on route 1 (addition flag lottery of “mode 1”). Specifically, when the number of games in the “ART first hit state” is “40”, the winning probability of the additional flag in mode 2 is set to 50%, and the winning probability in mode 1 is set to 33%.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the winning flag winning probability in the “ART high continuation state” (“mode 3”) is determined by the addition flag lottery (“mode 1” and “mode 1”) in the “ART first hit state”. It is set higher than that of mode 2 "). Specifically, when the number of games in the “ART high continuation state” is “40”, the winning probability of the extra flag in “Mode 3” is set to 83%.

  Note that in the “ART first hit state”, one set of games is basically played in 40 games (predetermined period), but when the number of ART games in “7 complete pseudo bonus” is won. The game of 40 games + additional games is performed. Therefore, when the sub gaming state shifts to “ART first hit state” in route 2 (“mode 2” extra flag lottery), there is a possibility that the number of ART games will be added by “7-set pseudo bonus”. In this case, as the number of games increases, the winning probability of the extra flag in the “ART first hit state” also increases.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the number of unit games added by the extra lottery in “7-pseudo pseudo bonus” reaches a prescribed number (100 games in the present embodiment), after “7-pseudo pseudo bonus” ends. The extra lottery game is played a prescribed number of times, and after the prescribed number of extra lottery games is completed, the sub gaming state shifts to the “ART high continuation state”.

  In the present embodiment, an extra flag lottery (ART continuous lottery) is performed for each game in the “ART first hit state” and the “ART high continuation state”. If the winning flag lottery is won in the middle of the set, the number of ART games (the number of additional lottery games to be continued after the end of the setting) is added for each game in the subsequent games. At this time, the player may be informed that when the extra flag is won, the player can be in a state where the extra lottery can be performed by the extra flag win. In addition, it may be configured to notify that the number of ART games can be added and lottery can be performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied at a timing such as when a predetermined game is consumed after winning the additional flag.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the notification of the number of games added by the winning of the additional number of ART games may be performed after the winning of the additional flag and before the notification of the winning of the additional flag, or after the winning of the additional flag In addition, it may be performed after the addition flag winning notification. Further, the number of games added by the lottery of the number of ART games may be notified when the initial number of games given at the start of the ART is digested. It may be configured such that the ART number is not notified without adding the number of ART games, and it is not known when the ART will end.

[Relationship between main game state flow and sub game state flow]
FIG. 99 shows a game flow in which the transition flow of the main gaming state (RT gaming state) shown in FIG. 97 and the transition flow of the sub gaming state shown in FIG. 98 are combined. Note that the gaming state indicated by the solid line block in FIG. 99 is the sub gaming state, and the gaming state indicated by the broken line block is the main gaming state. Also, in FIG. 99, for simplicity of explanation, the blocks of “ART first hit state” and “ART high continuation state” are collectively shown as one block “ART state”. Further, FIG. 99 shows only an example in which the RT gaming state transitions from the “RT1 gaming state” to the “RT5 gaming state” with respect to the transition of the “premium bonus preparation state” in order to simplify the description.

  As shown in FIG. 99, in the preparation state between the sub gaming states, the main CPU 51 performs transition control of the main gaming state (RT gaming state). For example, in the “7 ready pseudo bonus preparation state”, the main CPU 51 causes the main gaming state to go from “RT1 gaming state (normal state)” to “RT2 gaming state” and “RT4 gaming state” in this order. Transition control of the main gaming state is performed so as to shift to the “RT3 gaming state”. At this time, this RT gaming state transition control is the control described in FIG. 97 (for example, display control of a predetermined symbol combination).

  In the present embodiment, the transition between the main game state and the sub game state is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS.

  For example, a configuration is provided in which the sub gaming state is transitioned from “7-matched pseudo bonus”, “ART first hit state” or “ART high continuation state” (main gaming state is “RT3 gaming state”) to “chance zone”. May be. In this case, a predetermined profit may be given to the player according to the sub game state of the transfer source. For example, when the sub game state is shifted from “7-set pseudo bonus” to “chance zone”, a predetermined game is added to the number of ART games in “ART first hit state” when a specified point is acquired in “chance zone”. You may make it add a number. Further, for example, when the sub gaming state is shifted from the “ART first hit state” to the “chance zone”, the shift to the “ART high continuation state” may be confirmed. Further, when the sub gaming state is shifted from the “ART high continuation state” to the “chance zone”, the addition of the number of ART sets in the “ART high continuation state” may be determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which only one type of winning flag (ART continuation probability) in the “ART high continuation state” (83% in 40 games) is provided is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, in the “ART high continuation state”, a plurality of winning probabilities for the addition flag may be provided. In this case, when a specific condition is satisfied in the “ART high continuation state”, a higher winning probability of the extra flag may be selected.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of main operation processing of the pachislot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described with reference to a main flowchart (hereinafter referred to as main flow) shown in FIG.

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process when the power is turned on (S1). In this initialization process, it is determined whether the backup has been normally performed, whether the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 53 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area that needs to be erased for each game, such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this processing, input checks of the medal sensor 35S and the start switch 16S are performed. The details of the medal acceptance / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 extracts random values (0 to 65535) and stores the extracted random values in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 (S4). Next, the main CPU 51 extracts the first to third effect random numbers used in the reel effect and lock control in the “continuous lock state”, and provides the extracted first to third effect random numbers in the main RAM 53. It is stored in the effect random number storage area (not shown). In the present embodiment, each of the first effect random number value and the second effect random number value is extracted from the range of 0 to 255, and the third effect random number value is extracted from 0 to 65535.

  When the extracted various random number values are stored in a predetermined random value storage area, the main CPU 51 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random value extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect flag selection process (S7). Details of the effect flag selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a game start effect control process (S8). In this process, the type of reel effect and lock performed in the “continuous lock state” is determined. Also, in this process, the type of lock / function effect performed in the “normal state” is also determined. The details of the game start effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs reel stop initial setting processing (S9). Details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a start command transmission process (S10). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a start command to the sub control circuit 42. Note that the start command includes a parameter for specifying an internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a game start lock process (S11). In this process, the reel effect and lock at the start of the game corresponding to the type of reel effect and lock performed in the “continuous lock state” determined in the process of S8 are mainly performed. The details of the game start lock process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 51 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, driving of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R is controlled by an interrupt process (see FIG. 135) described later that is executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so as to maintain the constant speed.

  When the game state is “continuous lock state”, the acceleration process performed in S12 is substantially included in the game start lock process in S11.

  More specifically, as shown in the reel effect code determination table of FIG. 61, in the reel effect corresponding to the reel effect data index “RESEL_AC” selected when performing the normal acceleration process (the process of S12), Reel effect codes corresponding to “REDAT_AC” and “End code” are executed in this order. On the other hand, in the reel effect selected when the gaming state is the “continuous lock state” (for example, refer to the reel effect data indexes “RESEL_E05” and “RESEL_E19”), “REDAT_AC” and “End code” are finally set. Corresponding reel effect codes are executed in this order, and processing similar to normal acceleration processing is performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the “continuous lock state”, the reel rotation start process of S12 is also executed in the game start lock process of S11.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is not the “continuous lock state”, the main CPU 51 performs a wait process before the process of S12. In this process, when the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 51 digests the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 51 acquires the pull-in priority data and stores it in the pull-in priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 116 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop control process (S14). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are respectively pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a winning search process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores the data of the symbol code storage area (the symbol code storage area 2 and after in FIG. 88) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 84). In this process, the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are stopped, and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 23 to 26), Is matched. Then, the main CPU 51 may determine whether or not the display combination is displayed on the active line, and store the determination result in the display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lock process at the end of the game (S16). In this process, before the medal is paid out, a process for determining whether or not to perform reel production and locking is performed. Details of the game end lock process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs post-rotation stop processing (S17). In this process, for example, on / off control of movable accessory permission flag, sub-management state lottery process, post-stop map setting process, etc. necessary for the control of the lock / actual effect presentation based on the map in the “normal state” Various processing (lock setting processing) is performed. Details of the post-rotation stop post-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 128 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal payout processing (S18). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the payout number of the display combination determined in S15, and medals are paid out. At this time, in this embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 23 to 26), the number of inserted medals is two or three, and the number of medals paid out varies depending on the display combination. The maximum payout number (payout upper limit) is 14 sheets.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs RT control processing (S19). In this process, the main CPU 51 manages the RT gaming state. Details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a game end effect control process (S20). In this process, a lottery for shifting to the “continuous lock state” is performed under predetermined conditions. Details of the game end effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a payout end command transmission process (S21). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a payout end command to the sub control circuit 42. Note that the payout end command includes information related to the reel effect and the lock in the “continuous lock state” such as the value of the continuous lock state counter.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end check process (S22). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to various counters for managing the end timing of the bonus game and checks whether or not the operation of the bonus game is to end. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus operation check process (S23). In this process, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 134 described later. When the bonus operation check process ends, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S2, and repeats the processes after S2.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S31). The presence / absence of the automatic insertion request is determined by determining whether or not the automatic insertion counter is “0”. That is, the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “0”, and determines that there is an automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “1” or more.

  The automatic insertion counter is data for identifying whether or not a display combination related to re-playing has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the medals for the number of coins inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S31 that there is an automatic loading request (when S31 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs an automatic loading process (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic insertion counter is copied to the insertion number counter, and then the value of the automatic insertion counter is cleared. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 performs a process of S39 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S31 that there is no automatic insertion request (when S31 is NO), the main CPU 51 permits medal acceptance (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 3) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 11 are accepted. The received medals are counted and guided to the hopper 33.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S34). Specifically, the maximum value of the inserted number is set to “2” in the BB (RB) gaming state, and the maximum value of the inserted number is set to “3” in the other gaming states (general gaming state).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). In S35, when the main CPU 51 determines that the medal acceptance is not permitted (when S35 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S39 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S35 that the medal acceptance is permitted (S35 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal insertion check process (S36). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a medal is inserted, and adds “1” to the inserted number counter when a medal is inserted.

  Next, the main CPU 51 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control circuit 42 (S37). The medal insertion command includes a parameter for specifying the number of inserted coins.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the inserted number is a game start possible number (S38). In S38, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inserted number is not the game start possible number (when S38 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S38 that the inserted number is the game start possible number (when S38 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S39 described later. In this embodiment, the game start possible number in the BB (RB) game state is “2”, and the game start possible number in the other game states (general game state) is “3” (see FIG. 29). .

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the start switch is on (S39). When the main CPU 51 determines in S39 that the start switch is not on (when S39 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S39 that the start switch is on (when S39 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 3) is not driven, and the inserted medal is discharged from the medal payout opening 18. When this process ends, the main CPU 51 ends the medal acceptance / start check process, and moves the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described. In the present embodiment, internal lottery processing using various internal lottery tables described below is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means for executing internal lottery processing (internal winning combination determining means).

  First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state (S41). That is, the main CPU 51 grasps the current gaming state with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 85), and determines the type and number of lottery of the internal lottery table based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 29). decide. The number of lotteries indicates the number of times of lottery value subtraction and determination of whether or not a digit has occurred for each winning number defined by the internal lottery table.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs lottery value change processing (S42). In this process, the lottery value of the winning number related to the re-game is changed according to the game state. Details of the lottery value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a random value stored in the random value storage area (S43). Then, the main CPU 51 sets “1” as the initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a lottery value corresponding to the winning number with reference to the internal lottery table, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S44).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result in S44 is less than 0 (negative value) (S45).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S45 that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when S45 is NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S46). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set to a random value, and the winning number is incremented by one.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all winning numbers have been checked (S47). When it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 51 has not checked all the winning numbers (when S47 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S44 and repeats the processes after S44.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 51 has checked all the winning numbers (when S47 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets “0” as the data pointer (S48). That is, the main CPU 51 sets “0” as the small role / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

  Here, returning to the description of the processing of S45 again, when the main CPU 51 determines in S45 that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (when S45 is YES), the main CPU 51 According to the winning number, a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are acquired (S49).

  After the processing of S48 or S49, the main CPU 51 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 38 to 43) and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer. (S50).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area (S51).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S52). In S52, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (when S52 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S57 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S52 that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (when S52 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the internal winning combination determination table for bonus ( Referring to FIG. 37), an internal winning combination is acquired based on the bonus data pointer (S53).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area (S54).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S55). In S55, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (when S55 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S57 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S55 that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (when S55 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets the RT5 gaming state flag to play the game. The status flag storage area is updated (S56). Specifically, “1” is stored (set) in bit 7 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 85).

  Next, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S57). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the internal lottery process, and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

[Lottery value change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the lottery value changing process performed in S42 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 102) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 85) to determine whether or not the RT gaming state flag is on (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not “1” is set in any of the bits 2 to 7 in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 85). In S61, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT gaming state flag is not on (in the case where S61 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the lottery value changing process, and the process is an internal lottery process (see FIG. 102). ) To S43.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S61 that the RT gaming state flag is on (when S61 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines that the RT internal lottery table corresponding to the RT gaming state that is on. , The lottery value of the winning number (“1” to “27”) related to the re-game in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 30) is changed (S62). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the lottery value changing process, and moves the process to S43 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 102).

[Direction flag selection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the effect flag selection process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described.

  In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the flag conversion table (see FIG. 57), and based on the internal winning combination (winning number), the main CPU 51 assigns an effect flag number to a predetermined storage area (effect flag number) provided in the main RAM 53. Store in a storage area (not shown) (S71). Specifically, first, the main CPU 51 acquires an effect flag number based on the winning number (internal winning combination) acquired by the internal lottery process of S6. Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired effect flag number in the effect flag number storage area. That is, in this process, the effect flag number that determines the type of reel effect and lock in the “continuous lock state” is determined based on the internal winning combination (winning number).

  After the process of S71, the main CPU 51 ends the effect flag selection process, and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

[Game control process at start of game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the game start effect control process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 85) to determine whether or not the BB game is operating (S81). In S81, when the main CPU 51 determines that the BB game is in operation (S81 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the game start effect control process, and the process is the main flow (see FIG. 100). Move to S9.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the BB game is not operating in S81 (when S81 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state. (S82). In S82, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state (when S82 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the game start effect control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow. Move to S9 of FIG.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S82 that the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state (when S82 is YES), the main CPU 51 indicates that the value of the continuous lock state counter is “0”. It is determined whether or not there is (S83).

  In S83, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the continuous lock state counter is not “0” (when S83 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs effect lottery processing during the continuous lock state (S84). That is, in this embodiment, when the game state is “continuous lock state” (when the value of the continuous lock state counter is not 0), the type of reel effect and lock performed in the game is determined by lottery. Details of the lottery process during the continuous lock state will be described later with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107 described later. Then, after performing the effect lottery process (S84) during the continuous lock state, the main CPU 51 ends the game start effect control process, and moves the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S83 that the value of the continuous lock state counter is “0” (when S83 is YES), the main CPU 51 adds lock / workpiece information to the set map information. It is determined whether or not the type information is included, and the presence or absence of the lock is determined based on the lock and accessory type information (S85).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sub management state lottery process (S86). The details of the sub management state lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sign type lottery process (S87). In this process, for example, a map winning lottery process (AT lottery process) is performed. The details of the sign type lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110 described later. After the process of S87, the main CPU 51 ends the game start time effect control process, and moves the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

[Outline of continuous lock control]
In the present embodiment, when the game state is the “continuous lock state”, the reel effect and the lock are executed at the start of the game and / or at the end of the game. Here, an outline of reel production and lock operation control performed in the “continuous lock state” will be described.

  After the gaming state transitions to the “continuous lock state”, first, a count subtraction value (see the continuous lock state effect lottery table in FIG. 58) obtained based on the internal winning combination is subtracted from the value of the continuous lock state counter. (First subtraction process: S94 in FIG. 106 described later).

  If the result of the first subtraction process is 0 or less, the transition to the “ART state” of the sub gaming state is confirmed (YES determination in S95 in FIG. 106 described later). In this case, the reel control flag (second reel control flag) indicating the confirmation of the transition is set, and the reel effect and lock based on the continuous lock state counter value before the subtraction are executed in the lock at the time of the game start operation. At this time, in this embodiment, any one of the first reel control flags “6” to “15” (see FIG. 59) indicating that the reel effect and the lock are performed based on the continuous lock state counter value is also set. The

The second reel control flag is information indicating that one of the following two specific conditions (a condition for satisfying the transition to the ART state in the sub gaming state) is satisfied.
(1) In the “continuous lock state”, the value of the continuous lock state counter becomes “0” by subtraction of the count subtraction value (S95 in FIG. 106 described later is YES determination).
(2) A result (lottery result) obtained by subtracting the effect lottery value from the first effect random number value becomes a negative value, and the lottery is won (S100 in FIG. 106 to be described later becomes YES determination).

  On the other hand, if the result of the first subtraction process is larger than 0, first, in the “continuous lock state”, the first reel control flag “3” which is information indicating that the reel effect and the lock are performed based on the count subtraction value. To "5" (see FIG. 59) is set. In this case, in the lock at the game start operation, the reel effect and the lock based on the count subtraction value are executed. The first and second reel control flags are set in a reel control flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53.

  When the result of the first subtraction process is greater than 0, the effect lottery value obtained from the first effect random number value based on the internal winning combination (see the effect lottery table for continuous lock state in FIG. 58). Subtraction is performed (second subtraction process: S99 in FIG. 106 described later).

If the result of the second subtraction process is less than 0, the transition to the “ART state” of the sub gaming state is confirmed (YES determination in S100 in FIG. 106 described later). In this case, the second reel control flag is set, and it is determined based on the effect content lottery value which of the next effect processes (A) and (B) is to be executed.
(A) In the lock at the game start operation, the reel effect and the lock are performed based on the continuous lock state counter value before the subtraction.
(B) In the lock after the third stop, the reel effect and the lock are performed based on the continuous lock state counter value after the subtraction.

  When the effect process (B) is determined, any one of the first reel control flags “3” to “5” is set in the lock at the game start operation, and the reel effect based on the count subtraction value and Lock is performed.

  On the other hand, when the result of the second subtraction process is 0 or more and the “continuous lock state” is not the guaranteed game period, the predetermined condition and the predetermined lottery result described in the sub-game state transition flow of FIG. Based on this, the sub gaming state shifts from the “continuous lock state” to the “normal state”.

  In the continuous lottery effect lottery process of FIG. 106 and FIG. 107 described later and the game start time lock process of FIG. 115, the above-described “continuous lock state” control is realized.

[Direction lottery processing during continuous lock state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106 and FIG. 107, the continuous lottery effect lottery process performed in S84 in the flowchart (see FIG. 105) of the game start effect control process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 obtains the effect flag number stored in the effect flag number storage area (S91). Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the continuous lottery effect lottery table (see FIG. 58), and acquires the count subtraction value, the production content lottery value, and the production lottery value based on the production flag number (S92).

  Next, the main CPU 51 holds the value of the continuous lock state counter before subtraction (current) (S93). Then, the main CPU 51 subtracts the counter subtraction value from the value of the continuous lock state counter before subtraction (S94: the first subtraction process).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the continuous lock state counter after subtraction is “0” (S95). In S95, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the continuous lock state counter after the subtraction is “0” (when S95 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines S109 to S109 in the flowchart shown in FIG. The processing of S116 (processing when the transition to the “ART state” of the sub gaming state is confirmed) is performed.

  In this embodiment, since the count subtraction value is any one of “1” to “3”, if the “continuous lock state” is maintained until the end (10 game periods), the value of the continuous lock state counter is It always becomes “0”, and the transition to the “ART state” of the sub gaming state is confirmed (a privilege is given to the player). Further, when the count subtraction value “2” or “3” is acquired in the middle of the “continuous lock state”, for example, the value of the continuous lock state counter is set to “0” before 10 unit games are played. Thus, the transition to the “ART state” of the sub gaming state is confirmed.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S95 that the value of the continuous lock state counter after subtraction is not “0” (when S95 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets the value of the continuous lock state counter after subtraction. Hold (S96). Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the effect lottery table for continuous lock state (see FIG. 58), and based on the effect flag number, count subtraction value (any one of “1” to “3”) and the first reel control flag. (Any one of “3” to “5”) is acquired (S97). If the first reel control flag acquired in S97 is set in a reel control flag storage area (not shown), a reel effect and lock based on the count subtraction value are performed at the start operation.

  Next, the main CPU 51 obtains a first effect random value stored in the effect random number storage area (S98). Then, the main CPU 51 subtracts the effect lottery value from the first effect random value (S99: second subtraction process).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result in S99 is less than 0 (negative value) (S100). In S100, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is less than 0 (in the case where S100 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S109 to S116 described later (sub game state in the flowchart shown in FIG. 107). Process when transition to the “ART state” is confirmed. That is, when the lottery process of S99 and S100 is won, even if the value of the continuous lock state counter is not “0”, the transition to the “ART state” of the sub gaming state is confirmed.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S100 that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when S100 is NO), the main CPU 51 changes the value of the continuous lock state counter to the value of the continuous lock state counter after subtraction. Update (S101). Then, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the continuous lock state guarantee counter (S102). In the present embodiment, as described above, the “continuous lock state” is unconditionally maintained for a predetermined number of games (three games in the present embodiment) from the start of the “continuous lock state”. Is set. The value of the continuous lock state guarantee counter indicates information on the remaining guarantee period (number of games) in the “continuous lock state”.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the continuous lock state guarantee counter is “0” (S103). In S103, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the continuous lock state guarantee counter is not “0” (when S103 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the effect lottery process during the continuous lock state and starts the game. The time effect control process is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S103 that the value of the continuous lock state guarantee counter is “0” (when S103 is YES), the main CPU 51 has the effect flag numbers “01” to “03”. It is determined whether or not any of the above (S104). In S104, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect flag number is not one of “01” to “03” (when S104 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the effect lottery process during the continuous lock state. The game start time effect control process is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S104 that the effect flag number is any of “01” to “03” (when S104 is YES), the main CPU 51 stores the effect random number storage area. The second effect random number value is acquired (S105). Then, the main CPU 51 subtracts the specified value (“60” in the present embodiment) from the second effect random number value (S106).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result in S106 is less than 0 (negative value) (S107). In S107, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when S107 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the effect lottery process during the continuous lock state and also ends the game start effect control process. To do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S107 that the calculation result is less than 0 (when S107 is YES), the main CPU 51 updates the value of the continuous lock state counter to “0” (S108). That is, when the lottery process of S106 and S107 is won, the “continuous lock state” ends. Then, after that, the main CPU 51 ends the effect lottery process during the continuous lock state, and also ends the game start effect control process.

  Here, returning to the description of the processing of S95 and S100 again, the processing of S109 to S116 shown in FIG. 107 (“ART of the sub gaming state” performed when S95 is YES or when S100 is YES is determined. The process when the transition to the “state” is confirmed will be described.

  When S95 is YES or when S100 is YES, the main CPU 51 acquires the value of the continuous lock state counter before subtraction (S109). Next, the main CPU 51 obtains a second reel control flag (S110).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not any of the first reel control flags “3” to “5” has been acquired (S111). When the main CPU 51 determines in S111 that the corresponding first reel control flag has been acquired (if S111 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the effect lottery process during the continuous lock state and starts the game. The time effect control process is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the main CPU 51 has not acquired the corresponding first reel control flag (when S111 is NO), the main CPU 51 serves as a refresh counter provided in the main control circuit 41. A pseudo random number value stored in a predetermined register (not shown) that can be used is acquired as an effect content random value (S112). Note that the pseudo random number value obtained by the predetermined register is a value in the range of 0 to 127.

  Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts the effect content lottery value from the effect content random value (S113). Then, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result in S113 is less than 0 (negative value) (S114). In S114, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when S114 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the effect lottery process during the continuous lock state and also ends the game start effect control process. To do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S114 that the calculation result is less than 0 (when S114 is YES), the main CPU 51 turns on the lock flag after all stops (S115). The lock flag after all stops is information for identifying whether or not the reel effect and the lock are executed after the third stop of the reel in a state where the above-described specific condition (1) or (2) is satisfied. Yes, stored in the reel control flag storage area. Then, when the lock flag after all stops is on, the reel effect and the lock are executed after the third stop of the reel. That is, in the lottery processing of S113 and S114, lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform reel effect and lock after the third stop of the reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the value of the continuous lock state counter after subtraction (S116). Then, after updating the value of the continuous lock state counter, the main CPU 51 ends the effect lottery process during the continuous lock state and also ends the game start effect control process.

[Sub management status lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the sub management state lottery process performed in S86 in the flowchart (see FIG. 105) of the game start effect control process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stay flag is on (S121). In the present embodiment, when the sub management state transitions from “sub management state 0” to “sub management state 1” or “sub management state 2”, the sub lot management process lottery process has passed 10 games since the transition. Later, it is executed in the subsequent unit games. In other words, when the sub management state shifts from “sub management state 0” to “sub management state 1” or “sub management state 2”, the sub management state of the transfer destination remains in the period up to 10 games after the transition. The warranty period is maintained. In the guarantee period of this sub-management state, the stay flag is turned on, and the value of the stay counter is subtracted from “10” for each unit game in the guarantee period. That is, when the stay flag is on, it indicates that the current game is a game within the guarantee period. The stay flag and the stay counter are provided in the main RAM 53.

  In S121, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stay flag is on (when S121 is YES), the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the stay counter value (S125). At this time, if the value of the stay counter after subtraction is “0”, the staying flag is turned off because the next game is no longer a guaranteed period. After the process of S125, the main CPU 51 ends the sub management state lottery process, and moves the process to S87 of the game start time effect control process (see FIG. 105).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S121 that the stay flag is not on (is off) (when S121 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs sub-management state transition lottery processing (S122). Details of the sub-management state transition lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 described later.

  Next, after the processing of S122, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the sub management state has shifted from “sub management state 0” to “sub management state 1” or “sub management state 2” (S123). In S123, when the main CPU 51 determines that the sub management state has not shifted to “sub management state 1” or “sub management state 2” (when S123 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines the sub management state lottery. The process ends, and the process proceeds to S87 of the game start time effect control process (see FIG. 105).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S123 that the sub management state has shifted to “sub management state 1” or “sub management state 2” (when S123 is YES), the main CPU 51 starts the warranty period. Therefore, the stay flag is turned on and “10” is set to the value of the stay counter (S124). Then, after the process of S124, the main CPU 51 ends the sub-management state lottery process, and moves the process to S87 of the game start effect control process (see FIG. 105).

[Sub management status transition lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the sub management state transition lottery process performed in S122 in the flowchart of the sub management state lottery process (see FIG. 108) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the sub management state transition lottery process and the sub management state setting process based on it are not only performed at the end of the ART but also when the RT lottery value setting is changed (settings 1 to 6: see FIGS. 30 to 35). Also after resetting. In FIG. 109, an example of processing at the time of “ART end” will be described. Here, “at the end of ART” means that the RT gaming state has shifted from “RT3 gaming state” to “RT1 gaming state”.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the current state is the ART end time (S131).

  In S131, when the main CPU 51 determines that the current state is not the state at the end of ART (when S131 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines that the sub-management is based on the internal winning combination and the current sub-management state. The state transition lottery is performed, and the sub management state determined by the lottery is set (S132). Specifically, in this process, the main CPU 51 performs sub-management state transition lottery using, for example, a sub-management state transition lottery table as shown in FIGS. Then, after the process of S132, the main CPU 51 ends the sub management state transition lottery process, and moves the process to S123 of the sub management state lottery process (see FIG. 108).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S131 that the current state is the state at the end of ART (when S131 is YES), the main CPU 51 displays the sub management state transition lottery table corresponding to the end of ART. The sub-management state transition lottery is performed, and the sub-management state determined by the lottery is set (S133). Specifically, in this process, the main CPU 51 performs sub-management state transition lottery using, for example, a sub-management state transition lottery table provided exclusively for the state at the end of ART as shown in FIG.

  Then, after the process of S133, the main CPU 51 ends the sub management state transition lottery process, and moves the process to S123 of the sub management state lottery process (see FIG. 108). In the present embodiment, as described above, lottery of transition / stay of the sub management state is performed based on the internal winning combination, the current sub management state, and the like.

[Signed lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the sign type lottery process performed in S87 in the flowchart (see FIG. 105) of the game start effect control process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state (S141).

  In S141, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state (when S141 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the sign type lottery process and the game start effect control. The process (FIG. 105) is also terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub gaming state is the “ART state” (RT3 gaming state) and the preparation state (RT2, RT4 gaming state: “ART state” during the transition from the “normal state” to the “ART state”. In the case of “preparation state at the time of transition”), the map winning lottery process described later is not performed. Therefore, when the sub gaming state (RT gaming state) is “ART state” (RT3 gaming state) or “preparation state at the time of shifting to the ART state” (RT2, RT4 gaming state), no lock or bonus effect is performed.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S141 that the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state (when S141 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a map winning lottery process (S142). In this process, a map is determined and an AT (ART) lottery process based on the sub-management state and the internal winning combination is substantially performed. The details of the map winning lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the map is won by the map winning lottery process of S142 (S143). In S143, when the main CPU 51 determines that the map is not won (when S143 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the sign type lottery process and also the game start effect control process (FIG. 105). finish.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S143 that the main CPU 51 is winning the map (when S143 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning map is the map 6 or 7 (S144). ). In S144, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning map is the map 6 or 7 (when S144 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S147 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S144 that the winning map is not the map 6 or 7 (when S144 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the current state is in a penalty ( S145). In S145, when the main CPU 51 determines that the current state is not in a penalty (when S145 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S147 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S145 that the current state is a penalty (in the case where S145 is YES), the main CPU 51 changes the map to any of maps 0 to 3 (S146).

  Then, after S146, if S144 is YES or S145 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether the winning map is the map 5 or 7 (S147). In S147, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning map is not the map 5 or 7 (when S147 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S149 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S147 that the winning map is the map 5 or 7 (when S147 is YES), the main CPU 51 turns on the holding flag (S148). If S147 is YES, during the game (stay) period of the lock / function effect production based on any one of the maps 1 to 3, the map winning lottery process of S142 will win an AT or 7 bonus bonuses. Thus, the map information won by the processing of S148 is held. Then, after the process of S148, the main CPU 51 ends the sign type lottery process and also ends the game start effect control process (FIG. 105).

  Next, when S147 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs a map game number lottery process (S149). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines the number of map games (the number of staying games on the map) with reference to the map game number lottery table (see FIG. 74) and the map game number subtraction lottery table (FIG. 75). The details of the map game number lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lock setting process after the third stop (S150). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines at which game the lock operation and the movable combination 23 are to be performed from the start of the game of the lock and combination effect based on the map. The details of the third post-stop lock setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 described later.

  Then, after the process of S150, the main CPU 51 ends the sign type lottery process and also ends the game start effect control process (FIG. 105). In the sign type lottery processing of this embodiment, as described above, one map is selected from a plurality of maps based on the sub-management state and the internal winning combination, and the selected map is set.

[Map winning lottery process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the map winning lottery process performed in S142 in the flowchart of the sign type lottery process (see FIG. 110) will be described. In the present embodiment, the ART (notification) lottery is also substantially performed by the map winning lottery.

  In the map winning lottery process, the main CPU 51 performs map lottery based on the set sub management state (current sub management state) and the internal winning combination (S151). At this time, the main CPU 51 refers to the map winning lottery table corresponding to the current sub-management state among the map winning lottery tables shown in FIGS. Then, after the process of S151, the main CPU 51 ends the map winning lottery process, and moves the process to S143 of the sign type lottery process (see FIG. 110).

[Map game number lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the map game number lottery process performed in S149 in the flowchart of the sign type lottery process (see FIG. 110) will be described. This process is performed when any of the maps 1 to 4 and 6 is won in the map winning lottery process (S142 in FIG. 110).

  First, the main CPU 51 performs a lottery process for the map reference game number based on the map number of the set map (S161). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the map game number lottery table described with reference to FIG. 74, and performs a map reference game number lottery process based on the map number.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a map reference game number of 16G or more is selected by the lottery process of S161 (S162). In S162, when the main CPU 51 determines that the map reference game number of 16G or more is not selected (when S162 is NO), the main CPU 51 finally determines the map reference game number selected by the lottery process of S161. After that, the main CPU 51 ends the map game number lottery process and moves the process to S150 of the sign type lottery process (see FIG. 110).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S162 that the map reference game number of 16G or more is selected (when S162 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the map reference game number selected by the lottery process in S161. Is subtracted from the predetermined number of games (S163). In this process, first, the main CPU 51 refers to the map game number subtraction lottery table described with reference to FIG. 75 to determine a map game number subtraction value (any of 0 to −4). Next, the main CPU 51 adds the determined subtraction value to the map reference game number. Then, the main CPU 51 sets the number of map games subtracted by the process of S163 as the final number of map games, and then the main CPU 51 ends the map game number lottery process, and the process is a precursor type lottery process (see FIG. 110). ) To S150.

[Lock setting process after third stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the third post-stop lock setting process performed in S150 in the flowchart of the sign type lottery process (see FIG. 110) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of map games determined in the map game number lottery process described with reference to FIG. 112 is 34G or less (S171).

  In S171, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of map games is 34G or less (when S171 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the number of map games determined in the map game number lottery process as the lock setting reference game number. (S172). Then, after the process of S172, the main CPU 51 performs a process of S174 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S171 that the number of map games is not 34G or less (when S171 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines a lock setting reference game by lottery (S173).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the determined number of map games is 35G or more, the number of games obtained by subtracting any of 0G to 3G from 32G (any one of 29G, 30G, 31G, and 32G) Is the lock setting reference game number. Therefore, in the process of S173, first, the main CPU 51 determines the number of games to be subtracted from 32G (any one of 0G to 3G) by lottery. Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts the subtracted game number determined by lottery from 32G, and sets the subtracted game number as the lock setting reference game number.

  After the lock setting reference game number is determined by the above-described processing of S172 or S173, the main CPU 51 performs mid-board combination setting by lottery (S174). Although not described in detail in this embodiment, when the number of map games is 28G or more, whether or not to perform the lock / function effect processing within the range of the first game to the 16th game of the map (the middle of the map stay period). The lottery (mid-game bonus lottery) is performed. This middle stage character lottery process is performed based on the winning map information, the number of map games, and the like. In addition, when winning the middle game character lottery, in addition to the occurrence timing of the lock determined in the lock type lottery table described in FIGS. 77 to 83, the timing of winning the middle game character lottery (the first game of the map) The generation of the lock and the operation of the movable accessory 23 are executed in any of the -16th games). Although not shown in the drawing, the probability that the occurrence of the lock and the operation of the movable accessory 23 will be the same at each timing of the first game to the 16th game of the map in the middle game bonus lottery.

  Then, after the process of S174, the main CPU 51 determines the lock / commodity type (lock generation timing) based on the sub-management state, the map (map number), and the lock setting reference game number (S175). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the lock type lottery table corresponding to the current sub-management state and map (map number) in the lock type lottery tables described with reference to FIGS. Select. Then, after the process of S175, the main CPU 51 ends the third post-stop lock setting process and also ends the sign type lottery process (FIG. 110).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S9 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the turning cylinder stop number selection table (see FIG. 44), and acquires the rotating cylinder stop number based on the internal winning combination acquired in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. (S181).

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 45), and acquires various information corresponding to the rotation stop number based on the acquired rotation stop number (S182). Specifically, the main CPU 51, corresponding to the acquired rotation stop number, pull-in priority table selection table number, pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, forward push Time table change initial data and irregular pressing time table selection data are acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the rotating identifier “0FFH (11111111B)” in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 88) (S183).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores “3” in a stop button non-operating counter provided in the main RAM 53 (S184). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and moves the process to S10 of the main flow (see FIG. 100). The stop button non-operating counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Lock process at game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the game start lock process performed in S11 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described. In the present embodiment, a game start lock process and a game end lock process described later (see FIG. 127) described below are executed by the main control circuit 41. Therefore, the main control circuit 41 controls the driving of the reel effect based on the predetermined reel effect pattern executed during the game start lock process described below. In other words, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means for controlling the function of the reel effect performed at the start of the game (display row effect control means).

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the second reel control flag has been acquired (S191). In S191, when the main CPU 51 determines that the second reel control flag has not been acquired (when S191 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S195 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S191 that the main CPU 51 has acquired the second reel control flag (when S191 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the lock flag after all stops is on. (S192). In S192, when the main CPU 51 determines that the lock flag after all stops is on (when S192 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S195 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S192 that the lock flag after all stops is not on (when S192 is NO), the main CPU 51 refers to and holds the reel effect pattern table (see FIG. 59). The reel effect pattern corresponding to the value of the continuous lock state counter before subtraction is set (S193). At this time, in this embodiment, the first reel control flag (any one of “6” to “15”: refer to FIG. 59) corresponding to the value of the continuous lock state counter is also set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the value of the lock timer corresponding to the value of the continuous lock state counter before subtraction that is held (S194). By the processing of S193 and S194, the reel effect and locking based on the continuous lock state counter value before subtraction at the start of the game (during start operation) are started. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 performs a process of S198 described later.

  Here, returning to S191 and S192 again, if S191 is NO, or if S192 is YES, the main CPU 51 acquires one of the first reel control flags “3” to “5”. It is determined whether or not (S195). In S195, when the main CPU 51 determines that the corresponding first reel control flag has not been acquired (when S195 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the game start lock process, and the process proceeds to the main flow ( The process proceeds to S12 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S195 that the main CPU 51 has acquired the corresponding first reel control flag (when S195 is YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the reel effect pattern table (see FIG. 59). The reel effect pattern corresponding to the acquired count subtraction value is set (S196). Next, the main CPU 51 sets the value of the lock timer corresponding to the acquired count subtraction value (S197). By the processing of S196 and S197, the reel effect and lock based on the count subtraction value at the start of the game (during start operation) are started.

  After the process of S194 or S197, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is “0” (S198). When the main CPU 51 determines in S198 that the value of the lock timer is not “0” (when S198 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the processing of S198 until the value of the lock timer becomes “0”. stand by.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S198 that the value of the lock timer is “0” (in the case of YES determination in S198), the main CPU 51 ends the game start lock process, and the process proceeds to the main flow ( The process proceeds to S12 in FIG.

[Retrieve priority storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the drawing priority order storing process performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 stores the stop button non-operating counter in the main RAM 53 as the number of searches (S201). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a search target reel determination process (S202). In this process, for example, the main CPU 51 selects a predetermined reel from the rotating reels and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

  For example, in S202, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as a search target reel. Thereafter, various processes up to S211 to be described later are performed on the left reel 3L. When the process returns to S202 again, the middle reel 3C is determined as a search target reel. Then, various processes up to S211 described later are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when returning to S202 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as a search target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S203). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (the small combination / replay data pointer) and the operation stop button. Details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 117 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets “0” as the symbol position data and sets “21” as the symbol check count (S204). Then, the main CPU 51 performs a symbol code acquisition process (S205). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the effective line (winning determination line) of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. Details of the symbol code acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 updates the display combination storing area (see FIG. 84) based on the acquired symbol code and the data in the symbol code storing area (see FIG. 88) (S206). At this time, regardless of whether the internal winning combination is won or not, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (a displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storing area based on the stopped symbol.

  In this embodiment, the symbol code storage area information (symbol code and displayable role corresponding thereto) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable combination may be obtained from data prepared in advance that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIG. 23 to FIG. 26) may be acquired by collation. When the former method is used, the correspondence relationship between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a drawing priority order acquisition process (S207). In this process, the main CPU 51 draws in priority for the combination whose bit is “1” in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 84) and whose bit is “1” in the internal winning combination storage area. With reference to the ranking table (see FIG. 53), pull-in priority data is acquired.

  When a symbol of a winning combination (for example, a role related to “cherry”: see FIGS. 23 to 26) is displayed on a part of reels, the reel of “ANY” has its role. Do not get pull-in priority data. Further, if there is a possibility that a winning combination that has not been won is confirmed in the reel for which winning is confirmed, the drawing priority data is set to “stop prohibited (all bits 0)”.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired pull-in priority data in the pull-in priority data storage area (see FIG. 89) (S208). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that each priority value corresponds to a bit in the storage area. Next, the main CPU 51 adds 1 to the symbol position data and subtracts 1 from the number of symbol checks (S209).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S210). In S210, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of symbol checks is not zero (when S210 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S205 and repeats the processes after S205.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S210 that the number of symbol checks is 0 (in the case where S210 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of search times has been searched (S211).

  When it is determined in S211 that the main CPU 51 has not searched for the number of times of search (when S211 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S202 and repeats the processes after S202. On the other hand, when it is determined in S211 that the main CPU 51 has searched as many times as the number of searches (when S211 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority storage process, and the process is S14 of the main flow (see FIG. 100) Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the drawing priority order table selection process performed in S203 in the flowchart of the drawing priority order storing process (see FIG. 116) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the drawing priority table number is set, that is, whether or not the drawing priority table number is stored directly in the reel stop initial setting process (S9) (S221). ). When the main CPU 51 determines in S221 that the pull-in priority table number has been set (if YES in S221), the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority table selection process and stores the pull-in priority order. The process proceeds to S204 of the process (see FIG. 116).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S211 that the pull-in priority table number is not set (when S211 is NO), the main CPU 51 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 87) and the operation stop button. With reference to the area (see FIG. 86), the corresponding pull-in priority table number is set (S222). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority order table selection process, and moves the process to S204 in the pull-in priority order storing process (see FIG. 116).

  In S222, first, the main CPU 51 refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area, and acquires the data of the pressing order and the operation stop button. Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the drawing priority table selection table corresponding to the drawing priority table selection data, and acquires the drawing priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 sets the acquired pull-in priority table number.

[Design code acquisition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the symbol code acquisition process performed in S205 in the flowchart of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 116) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets valid line data (S231). In this embodiment, the effective line (winning determination line) is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the symbol position data for checking the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S232). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire information on the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 obtains a symbol code of the symbol position data for checking (S233). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the symbol code storing process, and moves the process to S206 of the pull-in priority storing process (see FIG. 116).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the reel stop control process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described. In the present embodiment, the reel stop control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 41. In other words, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means for executing reel stop control processing (stop control means).

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S241). In S241, when the main CPU 51 determines that an effective stop button is not pressed (when S241 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S241 and an effective stop button pressing operation is executed. Wait until.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S241 that a valid stop button has been pressed (in the case where S241 is YES), the main CPU 51 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 87) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 86) is updated (S242). Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operating counter (S243).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S244). Then, the main CPU 51 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 53 based on the symbol counter (S245).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S246). The details of the sliding piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 120 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 transmits a reel stop command to the sub-control circuit 42 (S247). The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of sliding pieces, and the ON / OFF edge of the stop switch. Note that the ON / OFF edge information of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S246, and stores the determined planned stop position in the main RAM 53 (S248). In this process, the main CPU 51 adds the number of sliding frames to the stop start position, and sets the result as the planned stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the planned stop position determined in S248 as a search symbol position (S249). Next, the main CPU 51 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 118 (S250). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 88) using the acquired symbol code (S251).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a control change process (S252). Details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S253). When the main CPU 51 determines in S253 that the pressed stop button has not been released (when S253 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the processing of S253 and waits until the pressed stop button is released. To do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S253 that the pressed stop button has been released (YES in S253), the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S254). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 42. At this time, the data structure of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S247. However, the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S254 is different from the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S247.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is “0” (S255). In S255, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inoperative counter is not “0” (when S255 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the pull-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 116 (S256). ). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S241 and repeats the processes after S241.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S255 that the non-operating counter is “0” (when S255 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 100). (Refer to S15).

[Sliding piece number determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the slip piece number determination process performed in S246 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 119) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 selects line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on a line mask data table (not shown) (S261). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main CPU 51 sets “10000000” in which the bit 7 corresponding to the “left reel A line” of the stop data is set as line mask data. Select. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main CPU 51 selects “00010000” in which bit 4 corresponding to “middle reel A line” of the stop data is set as line mask data. To do. Further, for example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main CPU 51 selects “00000010” in which bit 1 corresponding to “right reel A line” of the stop data is set as line mask data. To do.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is “2”) (S262). In S262, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not the first stop (when S262 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the second and third stop processing (S263). The details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 121 described later. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 performs processing of S271 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S262 that the main CPU 51 is the first stop (when S262 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the operation stop button is a left stop button (S264).

  In S264, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when S264 is YES), the main CPU 51 acquires the table selection data and the symbol counter at the time of the forward press (S265). In this process, the forward push table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 45). Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the first press stop table corresponding to the forward press table selection data, and acquires the sliding piece number determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S266). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 performs processing of S271 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S264 that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when S264 is NO), the main CPU 51 obtains the irregular pressing table selection data and selects the irregular pressing table selection. An irregular pressing stop table corresponding to the data is set (S267). In this process, the irregular pressing time table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 45).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a line change bit check process (S268). Details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 performs line mask data change processing (S269). Details of the line mask data changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 described later. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 refers to the set stop table at the time of irregular pressing, and acquires the number of pieces of sliding pieces determination data based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S270).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a priority pull-in control process (S271). In this process, the drawing priority order data corresponding to each symbol position in the range from the stop start position to the maximum number of sliding symbols “4” is compared, and the most appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined. Details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 124 described later. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the sliding piece number determination process, and moves the process to S247 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 119).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the second and third stop processing performed in S263 in the flowchart (see FIG. 120) of the sliding piece number determination processing will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is during the second stop operation (S281). In S281, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not during the second stop operation (when S281 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S284 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S281 that the main CPU 51 is in the second stop operation (when S281 is YES), the main CPU 51 presses the stop buttons in the order of pressing (the first stop is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not (S282). In S282, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not a forward press (when S282 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S284 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S282 that the main CPU 51 is a forward press (when S282 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a line change bit check process (S283). Details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a line mask data change process (S284). Details of the line mask data changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sliding frame number search process (S285). In this process, with reference to the stop table (FIGS. 48 to 50), the sliding piece number determination data is determined based on the stop start position.

  For example, when the line mask data is “00010000” corresponding to “middle reel A line”, the main CPU 51 refers to the column of “middle reel A line” of bit 4. Then, a search is sequentially performed as to whether or not the corresponding data is “1” for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols from the stop start position. Next, the main CPU 51 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is “1” to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the number of sliding pieces determination data. After the process of S285, the main CPU 51 ends the second and third stop processes, and moves the process to S271 of the slip piece number determination process (see FIG. 120).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 122, the line change bit performed in S268 in the flowchart (see FIG. 120) of the sliding piece number determination process and in S283 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 121). The check process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the change status is “1” or “2” (S291). In S291, when the main CPU 51 determines that the change status is “1” or “2” (when S291 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the corresponding line status (S292). In this process, in this embodiment, when the change status is “1”, the A line status is set, and when the change status is “2”, the B line status is set. Then, after the processing of S292, the main CPU 51 ends the line change bit check processing, and the processing is S269 of the slip piece number determination processing (see FIG. 120), or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 121). ) In S284.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S291 that the change status is not “1” or “2” (when S291 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the line change bit is on. (S293). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the column corresponding to the “middle reel line change bit” or “right reel line change bit” in the stop table (see FIGS. 48 to 50), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is stored. It is determined whether or not “1”. When the main CPU 51 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not “1”, that is, the line change bit is not ON (when S293 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the line change bit check process. , And the process proceeds to S269 in the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 120) or S284 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 121).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S293 that the data corresponding to the stop start position is “1”, that is, the line change bit is ON (when S293 is YES), the main CPU 51 The line status is set (S294). The B line status is data used for changing the line mask data. Then, after the processing of S294, the main CPU 51 ends the line change bit check processing, and the processing is S269 of the slip piece number determination processing (see FIG. 120), or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 121). ) In S284.

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 123, the line mask data to be executed in S269 in the flowchart (see FIG. 120) of the sliding piece number determination process and in S284 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 121). The change process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S301). Note that the setting of the C line status is performed in the case of forward pressing in the second post-stop control change process (see FIG. 126) described later.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the C line status is set in S301 (when S301 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button. A determination is made (S302).

  In S302, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button (when S302 is YES), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data twice to the right (S303). ). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is a middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop is a right stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from “00000010” to “10000000” by the process of S303. As a result, the column of bit 7 corresponding to the “right reel C line data” of the stop table for second and third stops (see FIGS. 48 to 50) at the time of forward pressing is referred. Then, after the processing of S303, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S270 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 120) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 121). ) In S285.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S302 that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when S302 is NO), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data to the left twice. (S304). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is not the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from “00010000” to “01000000” by the process of S304. As a result, the column of bit 6 corresponding to the “middle reel C line data” of the stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing is referred. After the process of S304, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change process, and the process is S270 of the slip piece number determination process (see FIG. 120) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 121). ) In S285.

  Here, returning to the processing of S301 again, in S301, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line status is not set (when S301 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets the B line status. It is determined whether or not there is (S305). In S305, when the main CPU 51 determines that the B line status is not set (in the case of NO determination in S305), the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data changing process, and the process is determined as the number of sliding frames (see FIG. 120), or the process of S285 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 121).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the B line status is set in S305 (when S305 is YES), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data once to the right (S306). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is “00000010”, it is changed to “00000001”. As a result, the column corresponding to “B line data” in the stop table (see FIGS. 48 to 50) is referred to. After the process of S306, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change process, and the process is S270 of the number of sliding pieces determination process (see FIG. 120) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 121). ) In S285.

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the priority pull-in control process performed in S271 in the flowchart (see FIG. 120) of the sliding piece number determination process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets a search order table (see FIG. 54) according to the gaming state (S311). Next, the main CPU 51 sets initial values for the search order counter and the number of checks (S312). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets “1” as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main CPU 51 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value for the number of checks. Specifically, “5” is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the start address of a stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the sliding piece number determination data (S313).

  Next, the main CPU 51 obtains the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S314). Next, the main CPU 51 adds the acquired number of sliding frames to the expected stop start address, and acquires pull-in priority data (S315).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pull-in priority data acquired in S315 exceeds the pull-in priority data acquired previously (S316). In S316, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pull-in priority data acquired in S315 does not exceed the pull-in priority data acquired previously (when S316 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S318 described later. Do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S316 that the pull-in priority data acquired in S315 exceeds the pull-in priority data acquired in advance (when S316 is YES), the main CPU 51 detects the slip acquired in S314. The number of frames is saved (S317).

  Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the number of checks and adds 1 to the search order counter (S318).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of checks is “0” (S319). In S319, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is not “0” (when S319 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S314 and repeats the processes after S314.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S319 that the number of checks is “0” (when S319 is YES), the main CPU 51 restores the number of sliding pieces that have been retreated (S320). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the priority pull-in control process and also ends the number of sliding pieces determination process (see FIG. 120).

[Control change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the control change process performed in S252 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 119) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is after the third stop (when S331 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process, and the process is S253 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 119). Move to.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S331 that the main CPU 51 is not after the third stop (when S331 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is after the second stop (S332). In S332, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is after the second stop (when S332 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a control process after the second stop (S333). Details of the second post-stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126 described later. After the process of S333, the main CPU 51 ends the control change process, and moves the process to S253 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 119).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S332 that it is not after the second stop (in the case of NO determination in S332), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is a forward press (S334). In S334, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressing is not forward (when S334 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process and moves the process to S253 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 119). .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S334 that the main CPU 51 is the forward push (when S334 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the forward push control change table (see FIG. 47) and the number of searches (S335). .

  Next, the main CPU 51 obtains a scheduled stop position (S336). Then, the main CPU 51 updates the change target position according to the acquired planned stop position (S337).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S337 matches the planned stop position (S338). In S338, when the main CPU 51 determines that the updated change target position does not coincide with the scheduled stop position (when S338 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of searches is “0”. (S339). When the main CPU 51 determines in S339 that the number of searches is not “0” (when S339 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S337 and repeats the processes after S337.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S339 that the number of searches is “0” (when S339 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the second- Obtained as the third stop table number and set the corresponding stop table (S344). Next, the main CPU 51 sets “0” in the change status (S345). After the process of S345, the main CPU 51 ends the control change process and moves the process to S253 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 119).

  Here, returning to the processing of S338 again, in S338, when the main CPU 51 determines that the updated change target position coincides with the planned stop position (when S338 is YES), the main CPU 51 displays the forward push time table. The value obtained by adding the change data and the change status is compared with the change data selection value (S340). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not they match (S341). When the main CPU 51 determines in S341 that the two do not match (when S341 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the above-described processing from S344.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S341 that the value obtained by adding the table change data in the forward press and the change status matches the change data selection value (when S341 is YES), the main CPU 51 selects the change data selection. The second and third stop table numbers and the change status at the time of forward pressing corresponding to the value are acquired (S342). Next, the main CPU 51 sets a corresponding stop table based on the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing (S343). After the process of S343, the main CPU 51 ends the control change process, and moves the process to S253 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 119).

[Control change processing after second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the second post-stop control change process performed in S333 in the flowchart of the control change process (see FIG. 125) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is a forward press (S351). In S351, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not a forward press (when S351 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop and also ends the control change process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S351 that the main CPU 51 is a forward push (when S351 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the C line check data is on (change status is “3”) or not. Is determined (S352). The C line check data is acquired by the process of S342 of the control change process (see FIG. 125). In S352, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line check data is not ON (when S352 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop and also ends the control change process. To do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S352 that the C line check data is on (if YES in step S352), the main CPU 51 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the second stop. It is determined whether or not (S353). In S353, when the main CPU 51 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not on (when S353 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S353 that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is on (in the case of YES determination in S353), the main CPU 51 performs the stored forward pressing. “1” is added to the second and third stop table numbers, and the corresponding stop table is set (S354). Next, the main CPU 51 sets the C line status (S355). Then, after the process of S355, the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop and also ends the control change process.

[Lock process at the end of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the game end lock process performed in S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the second reel control flag has been acquired (S361). In S361, when the main CPU 51 determines that the second reel control flag has not been acquired (when S361 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the lock process at the end of the game, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 100). (Refer to S17).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S361 that the main CPU 51 has acquired the second reel control flag (when S361 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the lock flag after all stop is on. (S362). In S362, when the main CPU 51 determines that the lock flag after all stops is not ON (in the case where S362 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the lock process at the end of the game, and the process is the main flow (see FIG. 100). Move to S17.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S362 that the lock flag after all stops is ON (in the case where S362 is YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the reel effect pattern table (see FIG. 59) and acquires it. The reel effect pattern corresponding to the value of the continuous lock state counter after subtraction is set (S363). At this time, in this embodiment, the first reel control flag (any one of “6” to “15”: refer to FIG. 59) corresponding to the value of the continuous lock state counter is also set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the value of the lock timer corresponding to the acquired value of the continuous lock state counter after subtraction (S364). By the processing of S363 and S364, the reel effect and locking based on the value of the continuous lock state counter after the subtraction at the end of the game (after the third stop of the reel) is started.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is “0” (S365). When the main CPU 51 determines in S365 that the value of the lock timer is not “0” (when S365 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S365 until the value of the lock timer becomes “0”. stand by.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S365 that the value of the lock timer is “0” (when S365 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the lock process at the end of the game, and the process proceeds to the main flow ( The process proceeds to S17 in FIG.

[After-rotation stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the process after the rotating cylinder stop performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described. In the present embodiment, the post-rotation stop post-processing described below is executed by the main control circuit 41. Further, in the post-rotation stop processing, when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, a state in which the lock / actual effect is not performed is set (the movable accessory permission flag is turned off).

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (S371). In S371, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT2 gaming state (when S371 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S373 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state in S371 (when S371 is YES), the main CPU 51 turns off the movable accessory permission flag (S372). Note that the movable accessory permission flag is a control flag for controlling whether or not an effect by the movable accessory 23, that is, whether or not to perform a lock / actual effect based on the map. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the sub game state is the “normal state” (the RT game state is the RT0 or RT1 game state), the lock / function effect is performed based on the map. In the sub-game state, no lock or bonus effect is performed. Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the movable accessory permission flag is turned off in S372.

  Next, after the processing of S372 or when S371 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RT gaming state has shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (S373). That is, in this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to “Bell spill” is displayed, the “ART state” is ended, and the sub gaming state is shifted to the “normal state”. In S373, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT gaming state has not shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (when S373 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S375 described later.

  On the other hand, in S373, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT gaming state has shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (when S373 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines that the sub management state transition lottery described in FIG. Processing is performed (S374). That is, when the symbol combination corresponding to “Bell spill” is displayed and the “ART state” ends, the main CPU 51 performs a sub-management state transition lottery. In the sub management state transition lottery process, for example, a sub management state transition lottery is performed using a sub management state transition lottery table provided exclusively for the end of ART as shown in FIG.

  After the process of S374 or when S373 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the map is currently being executed (S375). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the current unit game (game) is a unit game during a game period of a lock / function effect production based on a map (during a stay period of the map).

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the map is being executed in S375 (when S375 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs post-stop map setting processing (S376). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs a process for setting a held map. Details of the post-stop map setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S376, the main CPU 51 ends the process after the rotating cylinder stop and moves the process to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S375 that the map is not being executed (when S375 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RT gaming state has shifted from the RT1 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (RT gaming). It is determined whether or not the state is staying in the RT1 gaming state (S377).

  In S377, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT gaming state has not shifted from the RT1 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (when S377 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the process after the rotation stop and performs processing. To S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S377 that the RT gaming state has shifted from the RT1 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (when S377 is YES), the main CPU 51 turns on the movable accessory permission flag (S378). ). That is, when S377 is YES, the sub gaming state is the “normal state” (RT1 gaming state), so that the movable accessory permission flag is turned on, and the lock / function effect production based on the map is operable. Become. Then, after the process of S378, the main CPU 51 ends the post-rotation stop process, and moves the process to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

[Map setting after stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the post-stop map setting process performed in S376 in the flowchart of the process after the rotating cylinder stop (see FIG. 128) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of map games is “0” (S381). In S381, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of map games is not “0” (when S381 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the map setting process after the main CPU stops and the post-rotation stop process ( The process also ends (see FIG. 128).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S381 that the number of map games is “0” (when S381 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the holding flag is on (S382). .

  In S382, when the main CPU 51 determines that the holding flag is not on (when S382 is NO), the main CPU 51 turns off the movable accessory permission flag (S383). By this processing, a state in which the lock / function effect based on the map is not activated is set. Then, after the process of S383, the main CPU 51 ends the post-stop map setting process, and also ends the rotating cylinder stop post-process (see FIG. 128).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S382 that the holding flag is on (when S382 is YES), the main CPU 51 turns off the holding flag (S384).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs the map game number lottery process described with reference to FIG. 112 (S385). Next, the main CPU 51 performs the third post-stop lock setting process described in FIG. 113 (S386). By the processing of S385 and S386, the gaming state is set to a state in which the lock / actual effect based on the held map can be activated. After the process of S386, the main CPU 51 ends the post-stop map setting process, and also ends the rotating cylinder stop post-process (see FIG. 128).

[RT control processing]
Next, the RT control process performed in S19 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the RT control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 41.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 28) and checks RT game state transition conditions that can be established in the transition source (current) RT game state (S391).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RT gaming state transition condition is satisfied (S392). In S392, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT gaming state transition condition is not satisfied (when S392 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S394 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S392 that the RT game state transition condition is satisfied (when S392 is YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 28) and transitions. Based on the conditions, the RT game state flag of the transfer destination is set to a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 85), and the game state flag storage area is updated (S393).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a display command transmission process (S394). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a display command to the sub control circuit 42. The display command includes parameters that specify a display combination, a payout number, and the like. After the process of S394, the main CPU 51 ends the RT control process, and moves the process to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

[Game control processing at the end of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the game end effect control process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 85) to determine whether or not the BB game is in operation (S401). In S401, when the main CPU 51 determines that the BB game is in operation (when S401 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control process, and the process is the main flow (see FIG. 100). Move to S21.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the BB game is not operating in S401 (when S401 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state. (S402). In S402, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state (when S402 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the effect control process at the end of the game, and the process proceeds to the main flow. Move to S21 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S402 that the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state (when S402 is YES), the main CPU 51 indicates that the value of the continuous lock state counter is “0”. It is determined whether or not there is (S403). In S403, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the continuous lock state counter is not “0” (when S403 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow ( Move to S21 of FIG.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S403 that the value of the continuous lock state counter is “0” (when S403 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the penalty counter is “0”. Is discriminated (S404). In S404, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the penalty counter is not “0” (when S404 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S408 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S404 that the value of the penalty counter is “0” (when S404 is YES), the main CPU 51 has any of the effect flag numbers “01” to “03”. It is determined whether or not (S405). In S405, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect flag number is not any of “01” to “03” (when S405 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S410 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect flag number is any one of “01” to “03” in S405 (when S405 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the order of pressing the stop button of the player. Is determined to be the first stop of the left reel (S406). In S406, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressing order of the stop button is the first stop of the left reel (when S406 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S410 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S406 that the pressing order of the stop button is not the first stop of the left reel (when S406 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets “11” as the value of the penalty counter ( S407).

  After S407 or when S404 is NO, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the penalty counter (S408). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the penalty counter is “0” (S409).

  In S409, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the penalty counter is “0” (when S409 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a continuous lock state transition lottery process (S410). That is, in the present embodiment, lottery for shifting to the “continuous lock state” is performed after the third stop of the reel. The details of the lottery process for shifting to the continuous lock state will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S410, the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control process, and moves the process to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

  On the other hand, in S409, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the penalty counter is not “0” (in the case of NO determination in S409), the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow ( Move to S21 of FIG. That is, when the value of the penalty counter is not “0”, the continuous lock state transition lottery process is not performed, and the “continuous lock state” operation is not performed.

[Continuous lock state transition lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the continuous lock state transition lottery process performed in S410 in the flowchart (see FIG. 131) of the game end effect control process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 acquires a third effect random value stored in the effect random number storage area (S411). Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts a specified value (“12” in the present embodiment) from the third effect random number value (S412).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result in S412 is less than 0 (negative value) (S413). In S413, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 (NO in S413), the main CPU 51 ends the continuous lock state transition lottery process and the game end effect control process (FIG. 131). See also).

  On the other hand, in S413, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is less than 0 (when S413 is YES), it means that the main CPU 51 has won the continuous lock state transition lottery. Is set to "10" (S414). Next, the main CPU 51 stores “4” in the value of the continuous lock state guarantee counter (S415). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the continuous lock state transition lottery process and also ends the game end effect control process (see FIG. 131).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the bonus end check process performed in S22 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not “BB” (“BB1” or “BB2”) is in operation with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 85) (S421). In S421, when the main CPU 51 determines that “BB” is not in operation (when S421 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and the processing is S23 of the main flow (see FIG. 100). Move to.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that “BB” is in operation in S421 (when S421 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”. Is discriminated (S422).

  In S422, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (when S422 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs bonus end time processing (S423). In this process, the main CPU 51 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the gaming state flag (BB gaming state flag) corresponding to “BB” in operation. When the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the number of medals paid out exceeds 336 during the BB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end command transmission process (S424). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits a bonus end command to the sub-control circuit 42. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of the bonus (S425). Then, after the process of S425, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S23 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S422 that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (when S422 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets each value of the winning number counter and the possible number of games counter. Update (S426). The winning possible number counter is decremented by “1” when a small combination (a combination with a medal payout) is displayed, and the possible gaming number counter is decremented by “1” for one game regardless of the stop symbol.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is “0” (S427). In S427, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is not “0” (when S427 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process. Then, the process proceeds to S23 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S427 that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is “0” (when S427 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs processing at the end of RB. (S428). Specifically, processing such as turning off the gaming state flag (RB gaming state flag) corresponding to “RB”, clearing the winning possible number counter and the gaming possible number counter, and the like are performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S23 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

[Bonus activation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the bonus operation check process performed in S23 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not “BB” (“BB1” or “BB2”) is in operation (S431). In S431, when the main CPU 51 determines that “BB” is not in operation (when S431 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S434 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that “BB” is in operation in S431 (when S431 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether “RB” is in operation (S432). ). In S432, when the main CPU 51 determines that “RB” is in operation (in the case of YES determination in S432), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (see FIG. 100). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that “RB” is not in operation in S432 (when S432 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs RB operation processing based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 27). (S433). Then, after the process of S433, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

  If S431 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the bonus game is a win (S434). In S434, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bonus game is not a winning game (when S434 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S438 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S434 that the bonus game is a winning game (when S434 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the winning bonus game based on the bonus operating time table (see FIG. 27). Corresponding bonus activation processing is performed (S435). In this embodiment, in this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the bonus operating time table (see FIG. 27), sets “1” to the corresponding bit in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 85), The value of the bonus end number counter is set to a predetermined value (“336” in the case of “BB1” and “BB2”). Further, in this process, the RB operation process described in S433 is also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S436). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus start command transmission process (S437). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits a bonus start command to the sub-control circuit 42. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started. After S437, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

  When S434 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning combination related to replaying is a win (S438). In S438, when the main CPU 51 determines that the role related to replay is not winning (in the case where S438 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process of the main flow (see FIG. 100). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S438 that the combination related to replaying is a win (when S438 is YES), the main CPU 51 requests automatic insertion of medals (S439). That is, the main CPU 51 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. After the process of S439, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the interrupt process by the control of the main CPU 51 performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 saves the register (S441). Next, the main CPU 51 performs an input port check process (S442). In this process, signals input from various switches such as the stop switch 17S are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs timer update processing (S443). In this process, for example, the main CPU 51 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process. Next, the main CPU 51 performs communication data transmission processing (S444). In this processing, various commands are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 41 and the sub control circuit 42 as appropriate.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel control process (S445). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, and thereafter, each reel rotates at a constant speed. The three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 51 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the active line (winning determination line) of the display window). The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is decelerated and stopped. In the present embodiment, in the process of S445, not only the above-described normal acceleration process, constant speed process, and stop process, but also a reel effect pattern is set when the reel effect pattern is set during the acceleration process. Reel effect (reel action) and lock control processing are also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lamp and 7-segment driving process (S446). In this process, the main CPU 51 controls the 7-segment display 6 to display the number of payouts and the number of credits. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a register restoration process (S447). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the interrupt process.

<Description of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 149.

[Main board communication task]
First, a main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs reception check of the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41 (S451). Next, when receiving a command, the sub CPU 81 extracts the type of the received command (S452).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S453). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S453 that the command different from the previous command has not been received (when S453 is NO), the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S451 and repeats the processes after S451.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S453 that the sub CPU 81 has received a command different from the previous command (S453 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S454). ). The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S454, the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S451 and repeats the processing after S451.

[Direction registration task]
Next, an effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 extracts a message from the message queue (S461). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a message in the message queue (S462). When the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no message in the message queue in S462 (when S462 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S465 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S462 that there is a message in the message queue (when S462 is YES), the sub CPU 81 copies the game information from the message (S463). In this process, for example, various data such as an internal winning combination, a type of reel that has stopped rotating, a display combination, and a game state flag specified by parameters are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 83. The

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect content determination processing (S464). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines the contents of the effect, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. The details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 registers animation data (S465). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers sound data (S466). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers lamp data (S467). These registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process of S464.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a movable accessory effect process (S468). In this movable accessory effect process, the effect operation by the movable accessory 23 described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 21 and the effect action control process by the accessory LED 23b and the speakers 21L and 21R are performed. . The details of the movable accessory effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a rotating accessory process (S469). In this rotating combination process, the process corresponding to the operation sequence of the effect by the rotating combination 22 described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10 (rotating combination effect process) or the above-described FIGS. Processing corresponding to the stop operation sequence of the rotating combination 22 (rotating combination effect stop processing) is performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the effect (rotation effect) by the rotating combination 22 is started at the time of the game start operation, if the received command is a start command, the rotating combination effect processing is performed in S469. I do. On the other hand, since the rotating operation of the rotating combination 22 is performed at the time of the third stop of the reel, if the received command is a reel stop command, a rotating combination effect stop process is performed in S469. Note that details of the rotating accessory effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 148 described later. In addition, details of the rotation accessory effect stop process will be described later with reference to FIG. 149 described later.

  After S469, the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S461 and repeats the processes after S461.

[Production content decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the effect content determination process performed in S464 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 137) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a start command reception (S471).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S471 that the start command is being received (YES in S471), the sub CPU 81 performs a start command receiving process (S472). In this process, the sub CPU 81 extracts a random number for production, determines the production number by lottery based on the internal winning combination and the like and registers it. Here, the production number is data for designating the content of the production to be executed this time. Details of the start command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 139 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the production data at the start according to the registered production number (S473). The effect data is data that designates animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and effects such as display of video are executed. After the process of S473, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S465 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 137).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S471 that the start command is not received (when S471 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel stop command is received (S474).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S474 that the reel stop command is being received (when S474 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the stop time according to the registered effect number and the type of the operation stop button. The effect data is registered (S475). Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S465 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 137).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel stop command is not received in S474 (when S474 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the display command is received (S476).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S476 that the display command is being received (when S476 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a display command receiving process (S477). The details of the display command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 144 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 registers effect data at the time of display in accordance with the registered effect number and display combination (S478). Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S465 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 137).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S476 that the display command is not received (S476 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a payout end command reception (S479). In S479, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is time to receive a payout end command (when S479 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs payout end command reception processing (S480). Details of the payout end command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S465 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 137).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S479 that it is not when a payout end command is received (when S479 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a bonus start command reception (S481).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S481 that the bonus start command is being received (YES in S481), the sub CPU 81 registers effect data for starting the bonus (S482). Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S465 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 137).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S481 that the bonus start command is not received (when S481 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bonus end command is received (S483). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S483 that it is not at the time of receiving the bonus end command (when S483 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and the process of the effect registration task (see FIG. 137). Move to S465.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S483 that the sub CPU 81 is receiving a bonus end command (S483 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a bonus end command receiving process (S484). Details of the bonus end command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 registers effect data for bonus end (S485). After the process of S485, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S465 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 137).

[Start command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the start command reception process performed in S472 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 138) will be described. In this embodiment, the start command reception process described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 42.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the “normal state” (S491).

  In S491, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is the “normal state” (in the case where S491 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs processing during the normal state (S492). The details of the normal state process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the normal state process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S499 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is not the “normal state” in S491 (when S491 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the “chance zone”. (S493).

  In S493, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is the “chance zone” (in the case where S493 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs processing during the chance zone (S494). Details of the mid-chance process will be described later with reference to FIG. 141 described later. Then, after the chance zone process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S499 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S493 that the sub gaming state is not the “chance zone” (when S493 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is “7-set pseudo bonus”. Is discriminated (S495).

  In S495, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is “7-matched pseudo bonus” (when S495 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the 7-match pseudo bonus medium processing (S496). The details of the 7-set pseudo bonus mid-process will be described later with reference to FIG. 142 described later. Then, after the 7-set pseudo bonus medium process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S499 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S495 that the sub gaming state is not “7-matched pseudo bonus” (when S495 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is “ART first hit state” or “ART It is determined whether or not the state is "high continuation state" (S497).

  In S497, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is the “ART first hit state” or the “ART high continuation state” (when S497 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the ART processing (S498). ). The details of the ART processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the ART processing, the sub CPU 81 performs processing of S499 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S497 that the sub game state is not the “ART first hit state” or the “ART high continuation state” (when S497 is NO), the sub CPU 81 is described later. The process of S499 is performed.

  Then, after the processing of S492, S494, S496, or S498, or when S497 is NO, the sub CPU 81 refers to the navigation table (see FIG. 96), and produces a navigation effect corresponding to the sub gaming state and the internal winning combination. A number is set (S499). Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command, and moves the process to S473 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 138).

[Normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the normal state process performed in S492 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 139) will be described. In the present embodiment, the normal state process described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 42.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state (main gaming state) is “RT0 gaming state” or “RT1 gaming state” (S501). In S501, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the “RT0 gaming state” or the “RT1 gaming state” (when S501 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the normal state process and performs the process. The process proceeds to S499 in the start command reception process (see FIG. 139).

  On the other hand, in S501, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is “RT0 gaming state” or “RT1 gaming state” (when S501 is YES), the sub CPU 81 displays information on the set map. Is acquired (S502). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the map number of the map is “4” or “5” (S503). That is, in this process, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the AT (ART) is won.

  In S503, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the map number is “4” or “5” (ART winning) (when S503 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the “art first hit” in the sub gaming state. "Preparation state of state" is set (S504). As a result, the main gaming state transitions from “RT1 gaming state” to “RT3 gaming state” via “RT2 gaming state” (see FIG. 99).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “mode 1” as an additional flag lottery mode to be performed after the sub gaming state shifts to “ART first hit state”, and sets the value of the ART game number counter to “40” ( S505). By this processing, “ART first hit state” is set as the sub game state. Then, after S505, the sub CPU 81 ends the process in the normal state, and moves the process to S499 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 139).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S503 that the map number is not “4” or “5” (NO in ART) (when S503 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has the map number “6” or “ 7 ”is discriminated (S506). That is, in this process, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not “seven matched pseudo bonus” has been won.

  In S506, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the map number is not “6” or “7” (“7-matched pseudo bonus” is not won) (when S506 is NO), the sub CPU 81 is in the normal state. The intermediate process is terminated, and the process proceeds to S499 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 139). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S506 that the map number is “6” or “7” (“7-matched pseudo bonus” is won) (when S506 is YES), the sub CPU 81 Then, “7 ready pseudo bonus preparation state” is set in the sub game state (S507). As a result, the main gaming state shifts from the “RT1 gaming state” to the “RT3 gaming state” in this order through the “RT2 gaming state” and the “RT4 gaming state” (see FIG. 99).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the pseudo bonus game number counter to “50” (S508). As a result of this processing, “seven matched pseudo bonus” is set as the sub gaming state. Then, after S508, the sub CPU 81 ends the process in the normal state, and moves the process to S499 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 139).

[Chance zone medium processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the chance zone mid-process performed in S494 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 139) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the second reel control flag is on (S511). In S511, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the second reel control flag is not on (when S 511 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S514 described later.

  On the other hand, in S511, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the second reel control flag is on (when S 511 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets “ART ready state in high continuation state” in the sub gaming state. (S512). As a result, the main gaming state transitions from “RT1 gaming state” to “RT3 gaming state” via “RT2 gaming state” (see FIG. 99).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “mode 3” as the extra flag lottery mode in the “ART high continuation state”, and sets the value of the ART game number counter to “40” (S513). By this processing, “ART high continuation state” is set as the sub gaming state.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the in-lock effect number based on the reel effect pattern, the reel control flag, the continuous lock state counter, and the count subtraction value (S514). After the process of S514, the sub CPU 81 ends the process during the chance zone, and moves the process to S499 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 139).

[7-set pseudo bonus middle processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the 7-set pseudo bonus mid-process performed in S496 in the flowchart (see FIG. 139) of the start command reception process will be described. In the present embodiment, the 7-set pseudo bonus medium process described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. In addition, in the 7-set pseudo bonus middle process, an addition lottery (additional lottery) is performed in which the number of unit games (number of games) after the transition to the “ART state” is added.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus middle point is “6” (S521). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S521 that the pseudo bonus medium point is “6” (when S 521 is YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus medium lottery table (see FIG. 91) Based on the winning combination, the number of games is added and lottery processing is performed (S522). Then, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of games determined by the lottery process to the value of the ART game number counter. Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S524 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S521 that the pseudo bonus mid point is not “6” (when S 521 is NO), the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus mid point lottery table (see FIG. 90), Based on the internal winning combination, the lottery process for the points in the pseudo bonus is performed (S523). Then, the sub CPU 81 adds the pseudo bonus midpoint determined by the lottery process to the pseudo bonus midpoint before lottery. At this time, if the pseudo bonus midpoint exceeds “6”, the sub CPU 81 corrects the pseudo bonus midpoint to “6”.

  In the present embodiment, the initial value of the pseudo bonus midpoint may be set at the start of the 7-level pseudo bonus. For example, when “6” is set as the initial value of the pseudo bonus medium points, the number of games is determined by referring to the pseudo bonus medium lottery table (see FIG. 91) from the beginning of the 7-level pseudo bonus. Can be processed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the pseudo bonus game number counter (S524). Then, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the pseudo bonus game number counter is “0” (S525).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the pseudo bonus game number counter is not “0” in S525 (when S525 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process of the 7 pseudo bonuses and starts the process. The process proceeds to S499 in the reception process (see FIG. 139).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the pseudo bonus game number counter is “0” in S525 (when S525 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the pseudo bonus end lottery table (see FIG. 92). , And lottery is performed by adding the number of games based on the points in the pseudo bonus (S526: addition lottery). Then, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of games determined by the lottery process to the value of the ART game number counter.

  In this embodiment, if the pseudo bonus medium point is “0” in S525, as shown in FIG. 92, 40 games are added to the value of the ART game number counter. In this case, the value of the ART game number counter is the same as the number of games when winning the AT lottery. That is, when the “7-matched pseudo bonus” is won, at least the same number of games as the number of games won when winning the AT lottery is awarded. Will be granted.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of ART games is “100” or more (S527). In the determination process of S527, the sub CPU 81 may determine whether or not the pseudo bonus midpoint is “6”.

  In S527, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of ART games is “100” or more (when S527 is YES), that is, the transition of the sub gaming state to the “ART high continuation state” is substantially confirmed. In this case, the sub CPU 81 sets “ART ready state in the high continuation state” as the sub gaming state (S528). Next, the sub CPU 81 turns on the extra flag (S529). Note that the process of S529 may be performed before the process of S528, or may be performed after the process of S530 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “mode 3” as the addition flag lottery mode in the “ART high continuation state” (S530). By this processing, “ART high continuation state” is set as the sub gaming state. Then, after S530, the sub CPU 81 ends the 7-set pseudo bonus medium process, and moves the process to S499 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 139).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S527 that the number of ART games is not “100” or more (when S527 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets “preparation state of ART first hit state” in the sub gaming state. (S531). Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “mode 2” as the extra flag lottery mode in the “ART first hit state” (S532). By this processing, “ART first hit state” is set as the sub game state. Then, after the process of S532, the sub CPU 81 ends the 7-set pseudo bonus medium process, and moves the process to S499 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 139).

[Processing during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the ART processing during ART performed in S498 in the flowchart (see FIG. 139) of the start command reception processing will be described. In the present embodiment, the processing during ART described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. Further, within the processing during ART, processing for determining whether or not to continue ART (notification) is also performed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, after the ART continuation is determined in the middle of the ART game set, the remaining game of the set thereafter is subjected to the lottery process by adding the number of addition lottery games to be continued after the set is completed. . Then, after the addition lottery game is completed, an ART game including the next set of ART continuation lottery is started.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the extra flag is on (S541). The extra flag is a flag indicating whether or not the extra flag lottery mode (any one of “mode 1” to “mode 3”) is won, and a predetermined storage area (not shown) in the sub RAM 83. Stored in When the extra flag is on, it indicates that the extra flag lottery (ART continuous lottery) is won.

  In S541, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the addition flag is on (when S 541 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S545 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S541 that the extra flag is not on (in the case where S541 is NO), the sub CPU 81 refers to the extra flag lottery table (see FIG. 93) and determines the extra flag lottery mode and Based on the internal winning combination, the addition flag lottery processing (ART continuous lottery processing) is performed (S542).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the addition flag win is determined in the lottery process of S542 (S543).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S543 that the addition flag is not won (when S543 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S546 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S543 that the sub CPU 81 is the addition flag winning (when S543 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the addition flag (S544), and then performs the processing of S546 described later. In addition, by the process of S544, the extra lottery based on the extra game number lottery table (see FIGS. 94 and 95) can be performed from the next game.

  If the determination in S541 is YES, the sub CPU 81 refers to the additional game number lottery table (see FIGS. 94 and 95) for the number of ART games, and performs an extra lottery process based on the internal winning combination (S545). At this time, the sub CPU 81 refers to the additional game number lottery table corresponding to the ART game lottery mode. Then, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of games determined by the lottery process to the value of the ART game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the ART game number counter (S546). Then, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is “0” (S547). In S547, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not “0” (when S547 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART processing, and starts the processing when the start command is received (FIG. 5). 139)).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S547 that the value of the ART game number counter is “0” (when S547 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the addition flag is ON ( S548).

  In S548, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the addition flag is on (when S548 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns off the addition flag, sets the addition flag lottery mode to “mode 3”, and The value of the ART game number counter is set to “40” (S549). By this process, the “ART state” is continued. Then, after the process of S549, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART process, and moves the process to S499 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 139).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S548 that the extra flag is not on (when S548 is NO), the sub CPU 81 clears the set extra flag lottery mode and sets the sub gaming state to “normal”. Set to "status" (S550). Then, after the processing of S550, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART processing, and moves the processing to S499 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 139).

[Process when receiving display command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the display command reception process performed in S477 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 138) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the symbol combination related to “BB” (“BB1” or “BB2”) is displayed on the winning determination line (center line) (S561).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S561 that the symbol combination related to “BB” is displayed on the winning determination line (when S561 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub gaming state to “premium bonus”. (S562). Then, after the process of S562, the sub CPU 81 ends the display command reception process, and moves the process to S478 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 138).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S561 that the symbol combination related to “BB” is not displayed on the winning determination line (when S561 is NO), the sub CPU 81 wins “BB”. It is determined whether or not (S563).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that “BB” is won in S563 (when S563 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub gaming state to “Premium Bonus Preparation State” (S564). As a result, the main gaming state transitions from “RT1 gaming state” to “RT4 gaming state” to “BB gaming state” via “RT5 gaming state”. Then, after the process of S564, the sub CPU 81 ends the display command reception process, and moves the process to S478 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 138).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that “BB” is not won in S563 (when S563 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines “7 lip” (“7 lip middle stage 1” to “7 lip middle stage”). 10 ”and“ 7 Lip CU1 ”to“ 7 Lip CU6 ”) is determined whether or not a combination of symbols is displayed on the winning determination line (S565).

  In S565, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the symbol combination related to “7 lip” is displayed on the winning determination line (when S 565 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is in the ready state of the sub gaming state. The corresponding sub game state is set (S566). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 changes the sub game state from “7-set pseudo bonus preparation state” to “7-set pseudo bonus”. After the process of S566, the sub CPU 81 ends the display command reception process and moves the process to S478 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 138).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S565 that the symbol combination related to “7 Lip” is not displayed on the winning determination line (when S 565 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines “RT3 Lip” ( It is determined whether or not the symbol combination related to “RT3 Lip 1” or “RT3 Lip 2”) is displayed on the winning determination line (S567).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S567 that the symbol combination related to “RT3 lip” is not displayed on the winning determination line (when S567 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of display command reception. Then, the process proceeds to S478 in the effect content determination process (see FIG. 138).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S567 that the symbol combination related to “RT3 Lip” is displayed on the winning determination line (when S567 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub gaming state is present. The sub game state corresponding to the ready state is set (S568). Specifically, when the current sub gaming state is “ART ready state of initial hit state”, sub CPU 81 sets the sub gaming state to “ART first hit state”. Further, when the current sub game state is the “preparation state of the ART high continuation state”, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub game state to the “ART high continuation state”. After the process of S568, the sub CPU 81 ends the display command reception process, and moves the process to S478 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 138).

[Processing upon receipt of withdrawal command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the payout end command reception process performed in S480 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 138) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the “chance zone” (S571). In S571, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is the “chance zone” (when S571 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S574 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S571 that the sub gaming state is not the “chance zone” (when S571 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the continuous lock state counter is “10”. Is discriminated (S572). Then, in S572, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the continuous lock state counter is not “10” (when S 572 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the payout end command reception process and the contents of the effects. The determination process is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S572 that the value of the continuous lock state counter is “10” (when S572 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub gaming state to “chance zone” ( S573). Then, after the process of S573, the sub CPU 81 ends the payout end command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process.

  If S571 is YES, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the continuous lock state counter is “0” (S574). In S574, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the continuous lock state counter is not “0” (when S 574 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the payout end command reception process and the contents of the effects. The determination process is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S574 that the value of the continuous lock state counter is “0” (when S574 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub gaming state to the “normal state” ( S575). And after the process of S575, sub CPU81 complete | finishes the process at the time of reception of a payout completion command, and also complete | finishes an effect content determination process.

[Process when receiving bonus end command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the bonus end command reception process performed in S484 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 138) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 sets “ART ready state in high continuation state” in the sub gaming state (S581). Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the mode of the addition flag lottery (ART continuous lottery) of the number of ART games to “mode 3” (S582).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is “1” or more (S583). In S583, when the sub CPU81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is “1” or more (when S583 is YES), the sub CPU81 ends the bonus end command reception process and produces the process. The process proceeds to S485 in the content determination process (see FIG. 138).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S583 that the value of the ART game number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (when S583 is NO), the sub CPU 81 adds “40” to the value of the ART game number counter. (S584). After the process of S584, the sub CPU 81 ends the bonus end command reception process, and moves the process to S485 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 138).

[Moving accessory production process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the movable accessory effect process performed in S468 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 137) will be described. Here, the rendering process in the case of driving the movable accessory 23 according to the first rendering operation sequence shown in FIG. 18 will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a movable accessory effect lottery has been won (S591). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a predetermined map (predetermined lock and accessory type) has been won by map lottery. When the sub CPU 81 determines in S591 that the movable accessory effect lottery has not been won (when S591 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the movable accessory effect process, and the process is registered as an effect registration task (FIG. 137).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S591 that the sub CPU 81 has won the movable accessory effect lottery (when S591 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that each movable unit of the movable accessory 23 is replaced by each movable unit. The liquid crystal display device 10 is rotationally driven in a direction exposed on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 10 (exposure direction: directions of arrows R1 and R2 in FIG. 16) (S592). At the start of the production by the movable accessory 23, in S592, the sub CPU 81 rotationally drives each movable unit for a predetermined step (eight steps) from the housed state (the state shown in FIG. 16) in the exposure direction. . This process corresponds to a series of operations from the “stop” state of the order “1” to the “acceleration 1” operation of the order “2” in the first effect operation sequence shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the detection element 74 (photo sensor) has detected the drive (production start) of the pair of movable units of the movable accessory 23 (S593).

  In S593, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the driving of the pair of movable units is not detected (when S593 is NO), the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S592, and the detection element 74 causes the pair of movable units to move. The processes of S592 and S593 are repeated until driving is detected. This iterative process corresponds to the “acceleration 2” operation in the order “3” in the first effect operation sequence shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S593 that the driving of the pair of movable units of the movable accessory 23 has been detected (in the case where S593 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the accessory provided to the movable accessory 23. The lighting of the LED 23b and the sound (sound) output by the speakers 21L and 21R are started (S594). By this process, an effect in which a mechanical effect by the pair of movable units of the movable accessory 23, an effect by the accessory LED 23b, and an effect by voice output is started.

  Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 performs a predetermined effect operation process on the movable accessory 23 (S595). In this process, the sub CPU 81 rotationally drives each movable unit in the exposure direction until the tips on the arc-shaped portion side of each movable unit of the movable accessory 23 come into contact with each other (until the state shown in FIG. 17). After the contact, the state is maintained for a predetermined period (3500 msec). Further, during the mechanical series of effect processing of the pair of movable units, the predetermined effect by the light emission and the sound output of the accessory LED 23b is executed under the control of the sub CPU 81. The process of S595 is a series of operations from the “acceleration 3” operation in the order “4” to the “stop (with excitation)” operation in the order “6” in the first effect operation sequence shown in FIG. Correspond.

  Then, after each movable unit is stopped for a predetermined period, the sub CPU 81 moves each movable unit of the movable accessory 23 in a direction in which each movable unit is stored on the back side of the decorative frame 30 (storage direction: arrow R3 in FIG. 17). And in the direction of R4) (S596).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the detection element 74 (photo sensor) detects the storage of the pair of movable units (end of effect) (S597).

  In S597, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the storage of the pair of movable units is not detected (when S597 is NO), the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S596, and the detection element 74 causes the movable accessory 23 to be stored. The processes of S596 and S597 are repeated until the storage is detected. This repetitive processing corresponds to the “acceleration 4” operation in the order “7” in the first effect operation sequence shown in FIG. In addition, during the repeated processing of S596 and S597, a predetermined effect by the light emission of the accessory LED 23b and the output of sound is executed under the control of the sub CPU 81.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the storage of the pair of movable units is detected (YES in S597), the sub CPU 81 turns off the accessory LED 23b, stops outputting audio, The movable unit is stopped (S598). That is, in this embodiment, when the detection element 74 detects the storage of the pair of movable units, the effect by the light emission of the accessory LED 23b and the sound output is stopped in conjunction with the stop operation of the pair of movable units.

  In the stop operation of the pair of movable units in the process of S598, the movable units are rotated by a predetermined number of steps while being decelerated and stopped. This stop operation corresponds to the “deceleration” operation in the order “8” in the first effect operation sequence shown in FIG.

  After the process of S598, the sub CPU 81 ends the movable accessory effect process, and moves the process to S469 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 137). In the present embodiment, when a predetermined map (predetermined lock and accessory type) is won by map lottery, the movable accessory 23 is driven as described above. In the present embodiment, since the above-described effect processing of the movable accessory 23 is performed in synchronization with the generation timing of the lock, the effect by the lock, the mechanical effect by the pair of movable units, the effect by the accessory LED 23b, and It is possible to show the player the effect in which the four effects of the sound output are linked.

[Rotating material processing]
(1) Rotating character effect processing Next, referring to FIG. 148, in S469 (rotating character processing) in the flowchart of the effect registration task (refer to FIG. 137), the rotating character effect processing performed at the time of the game start operation. Will be described. 148 is a rotating character effect process corresponding to the operation sequence of the left and right shaking effect when the shaking frequency of the rotating character 22 is “low” shown in FIG. 8. . In addition, the rotating accessory effect process described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as a means (rotation decoration portion effect control unit) for controlling the effect operation by the rotating accessory 22.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a winning combination effect lottery (not shown) has been won (S601). In S601, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning combination effect lottery has not been won (when S601 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the rotating feature effect process, and the process is registered as an effect registration task (FIG. 137).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S601 that the sub CPU 81 has won the rotating combination effect lottery (when S601 is YES), the sub CPU 81 moves the rotating combination 22 to the basic position (step position “7”: Rotate 15 steps (22.5 degrees) in the reverse direction (counterclockwise) from (see FIG. 7) (S602). By this processing, the rotational position of the rotating accessory 22 moves from the step position “7” to the step position “232”. This process corresponds to a series of processes from the “stop” state of the procedure “1” to the “acceleration” operation of the procedure “2” in the operation sequence shown in FIG.

  Next, after the processing of S601, the sub CPU 81 stops the operation of the rotating accessory 22 for 100 msec (S602). In this process, the sub CPU 81 excites the motor to switch the rotation direction of the rotating accessory 22 from the reverse direction to the forward direction. This process corresponds to the “stop (with excitation)” operation of the procedure “3” in the operation sequence shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 rotates the rotating accessory 22 by 30 steps (45 degrees) in the forward direction (clockwise) from the stop position of S602 (S604). By this process, the rotational position of the rotating accessory 22 moves from the step position “232” to the step position “22”. This process corresponds to the “acceleration” operation of the procedure “4” in the operation sequence shown in FIG.

  Next, after the processing of S604, the sub CPU 81 stops the operation of the rotating accessory 22 for 100 msec (S605). In this process, the sub CPU 81 excites the motor to switch the rotation direction of the rotating accessory 22 from the forward direction to the reverse direction. This process corresponds to the “stop (with excitation)” operation of the procedure “5” in the operation sequence shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 rotates the rotating combination 22 by 30 steps (45 degrees) in the reverse direction from the stop position of S605 (S606). By this process, the rotational position of the rotating accessory 22 moves from the step position “22” to the step position “232”. This process corresponds to the “acceleration” operation of the procedure “6” in the operation sequence shown in FIG.

  Next, after the processing of S606, the sub CPU 81 stops the operation of the rotating accessory 22 for 100 msec (S607). In this process, the sub CPU 81 excites the motor to switch the rotation direction of the rotating accessory 22 from the reverse direction to the forward direction. This process corresponds to the “stop (with excitation)” operation of the procedure “7” in the operation sequence shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 rotates the rotating combination 22 by 15 steps (22.5 degrees) in the forward direction from the stop position of S607 (S608). By this processing, the rotational position of the rotating accessory 22 moves from the step position “232” to the step position “7” (basic position). This process corresponds to the “acceleration” operation of the procedure “8” in the operation sequence shown in FIG.

  Next, after the processing of S608, the sub CPU 81 stops the operation of the rotating accessory 22 for 3000 msec (S609). In this process, the sub CPU 81 excites the motor to switch the rotation direction of the rotating accessory 22 from the forward direction to the reverse direction. This process corresponds to the “stop (with excitation)” operation of the procedure “9” in the operation sequence shown in FIG.

  After that, the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S602 and repeats the processes after S602. In the operation sequence of the left / right swing effect when the swing frequency of the rotating combination 22 is “low” shown in FIG. 8, the rotating combination processing is performed in this way.

  Note that the processing flow similar to the processing flow shown in FIG. 148 is also applied to the case where the operation sequence of the left / right shaking effect when the shaking frequency of the rotating accessory 22 is “medium” shown in FIG. 9 is executed. be able to. However, in this case, the stop period of the rotating accessory 22 in the process of S609 in FIG. 148 is set to 1500 msec.

  In addition, the processing flow similar to the processing flow shown in FIG. 148 is also applied when the operation sequence of the left / right swing effect when the swing frequency of the rotating accessory 22 is “large” shown in FIG. 10 is executed. be able to. However, in this case, the stop period of the rotating accessory 22 in the process of S609 in FIG. 148 is set to 100 msec.

(2) Rotating character effect stop processing Next, referring to FIG. 149, in S469 (rotating character processing) in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 137), the rotating character effect performed at the third stop of the reel. The production stop process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not an effect process for the rotating accessory 22 is being performed (S611). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S611 that the effect of the rotating accessory 22 is not being processed (in the case where S611 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the rotating accessory effect stop process, and the process is registered as an effect registration task (FIG. 137).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S611 that the sub CPU 81 is performing the effect process of the rotating combination 22 (when S611 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the current rotation position of the rotating combination 22 (the rotation position detecting unit). It is determined whether or not the central position 26b is the step position “7” (basic position) (S612). In S612, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current rotation position of the rotating accessory 22 is the step position “7” (when S612 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stops the rotating accessory 22 and rotates it. The accessory effect stop process is terminated, and the process proceeds to S461 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 137).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S612 that the current rotation position of the rotating accessory 22 is not the step position “7” (basic position) (NO in S612), the sub CPU 81 determines that the rotating accessory 22 It is determined whether or not the current rotation position is any one of step positions “8” to “127” (S613).

  In S613, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current rotation position of the rotating combination 22 is one of the step positions “8” to “127” (when S613 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the rotating combination 22 It is determined whether or not the current rotation of the object 22 is a forward rotation (S614).

  In S614, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current rotation of the rotating combination 22 is a forward rotation (when S614 is YES), the sub CPU 81 switches the rotation of the rotating combination 22 to a reverse rotation and rotates the rotation. The accessory 22 is rotated to the step position “230” and stopped, and then the rotation of the accessory 22 is switched to forward rotation (S615). After the process of S615, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S622 described later.

  In addition, when S614 is YES determination, the rotating combination 22 is stopped according to the stop operation sequence of the rotating combination 22 demonstrated in FIG. Therefore, in the processing of S615, first, the sub CPU 81 stops the rotating combination 22 and switches the rotation direction of the rotating combination 22 from the forward direction to the reverse direction ("stop (in sequence" 2 "in FIG. 15). Excitation) ”operation). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines that the rotation position detection unit 26b of the rotating combination 22 is detected by the detection element 27 (photo sensor) disposed at the step position “0” (the rotation position of the rotating combination 22 is the step position “ The rotating combination 22 is rotated in the reverse direction (until “acceleration” operation in order “3”). Next, the sub CPU 81 further rotates the rotating accessory 22 while decelerating it by 10 steps while decelerating it to the step position “230” (“deceleration” operation in order “4”). Then, the sub CPU 81 stops the rotating combination 22 at the step position “230” and switches the rotation direction of the rotating combination 22 from the reverse direction to the forward direction in that state (“stop (with excitation) in the order“ 5 ””). ) "Operation).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S614 that the current rotation of the rotating combination 22 is not a forward rotation (if S614 is NO, the current rotation of the rotating combination 22 is a reverse rotation), The CPU 81 keeps the rotational direction of the rotating combination 22 maintained (reverse rotation), rotates the rotating combination 22 to the step position “230” and stops it, and then sequentially rotates the rotating combination 22. Switch to rotation (S616). Then, after the process of S616, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S622 described later.

  In addition, when S614 is NO determination, the rotating combination 22 is stopped according to the stop operation sequence of the rotating combination 22 described in FIG. Therefore, in the process of S616, first, the sub CPU 81 reversely rotates the rotating combination 22 until the rotation position of the rotating combination 22 reaches the step position “0” (“2” in the order “2” in FIG. 14). Acceleration "operation). Next, the sub CPU 81 further rotates the rotating accessory 22 while decelerating it by reverse rotation for 10 steps and rotationally moves it to the step position “230” (“deceleration” operation in order “3”). Then, the sub CPU 81 stops the rotating combination 22 at the step position “230”, and switches the rotation direction of the rotating combination 22 from the reverse direction to the forward direction in that state (“stop (with excitation) of the order“ 4 ””). ) "Operation).

  Here, returning to the processing of S613 again, in S613, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current rotational position of the rotating accessory 22 is not one of the step positions “8” to “127” (NO in S613). The operation executed in the case of determination) will be described. When S613 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current rotation position of the rotating accessory 22 is any one of the step positions “0” to “6” (S617).

  In S617, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current rotation position of the rotating combination 22 is one of the step positions “0” to “6” (when S617 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the rotating combination It is determined whether or not the current rotation of the object 22 is a forward rotation (S618).

  In S618, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current rotation of the rotating accessory 22 is a forward rotation (when S 617 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S622 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S618 that the current rotation of the rotating combination 22 is not a forward rotation (if S618 is NO, the current rotation of the rotating combination 22 is a reverse rotation), The CPU 81 keeps the rotational direction of the rotating combination 22 maintained (reverse rotation), rotates the rotating combination 22 to the step position “230” and stops, and then reverses the rotation of the rotating combination 22. Switching from direction to forward rotation (S619). Then, after the process of S619, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S622 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S617 that the current rotation position of the rotating accessory 22 is not one of the step positions “0” to “6” (when S617 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the rotation. It is determined whether or not the current rotation of the accessory 22 is a forward rotation (S620).

  In S620, when the sub CPU81 determines that the current rotation of the rotating accessory 22 is a forward rotation (when S620 is YES), the sub CPU81 performs the process of S622 described later. In addition, when S620 is YES determination, the rotating combination 22 is stopped according to the stop operation sequence of the rotating combination 22 described in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S620 that the current rotation of the rotating combination 22 is not a forward rotation (when S620 is NO, the current rotation of the rotating combination 22 is a reverse rotation), The CPU 81 switches the rotation of the rotating combination 22 from reverse rotation to forward rotation (S621). If S620 is NO, the rotating combination 22 is stopped in accordance with the stop operation sequence of the rotating combination 22 described with reference to FIG. 12. Therefore, in the process of S621, “ Processing corresponding to the “stop (with excitation)” operation is performed.

  Then, after the processing of S615, S616, S619, or S621, or when S618 or S620 is YES, the sub CPU 81 determines that the rotating combination 22 reaches the step position “0” (the rotation position of the rotating combination 22). The rotating combination 22 is rotated forward (until the detection unit 26b detects the detection element 27 arranged at the step position “0”) (S622). Note that the processing of S622, for example, the stop operation sequence shown in FIG. 15, corresponds to the “acceleration” operation of order “6”.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 moves the rotating accessory 22 to the step position “7” (basic position) and stops it (S623). Note that the process of S623 is a process corresponding to the “deceleration” operation of order “7” in the stop operation sequence shown in FIG. 15, for example. Therefore, in the process of S623, the sub CPU 81 moves the rotary accessory 22 to the step position “7” while decelerating it by forward rotation and stops it. In the present embodiment, when the reel is stopped for the third time during the effect process of the rotating combination 22, the rotating combination 22 is stopped at the basic position in this way.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, main operations are performed according to various processing procedures described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 149.

<Various effects>
Here, various effects obtained by the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment will be described together.

[Various effects that can be obtained by controlling the performance of rotating and moving objects]
In the stop operation of the rotating combination 22 of the present embodiment, as described above, according to the optimal stop operation sequence according to the rotation state (rotational position and direction) of the rotating combination 22 at the time of the third stop of the reel. The rotating accessory 22 is stopped at the basic position. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the rotating combination 22 can be efficiently stopped at the basic position, so that the load on the rotating shaft portion and the driving unit of the rotating combination 22 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, a detection element 74 (photosensor) for detecting the drive (storage) of the pair of movable units is separately provided, and based on the detection result of the detection element 74, the accessory The effect by the LED 23b and the effect by the sound output are operated in conjunction with the effect by the movable accessory 23. Therefore, in this embodiment, the plurality of decorative members can be reliably operated in conjunction with each other, and the processing load of the sub-control circuit 42 when performing the effect processing in which the plurality of decorative members are interlocked is reduced. can do.

[Various effects that can be obtained by directing locks and effects during normal conditions]
As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the sub gaming state is the “normal state” (RT1 or RT0 gaming state), the map winning lottery is performed, and the lock / function effect is based on the winning map. Is done. At this time, the number of map games is randomly determined by lottery, and the generation timing of the lock and the operation timing of the movable accessory 23 driven simultaneously with the lock, that is, the lock and accessory type are also randomly determined by lottery. .

  In addition, in the map game number determination process, when the map reference game number selected from the map game number lottery table (see FIG. 74) is a predetermined value (for example, 16G) or more, the map game number subtraction lottery table (see FIG. 75), a predetermined subtraction game number (0G to 4G) is determined, and the determined subtraction game number is subtracted from the map reference game number to determine the map game number. That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of map game numbers can be set from one map reference game number, so the number of map reference game numbers (map game numbers) defined in the map game number lottery table is reduced. Data amount can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the map type is determined according to the internal winning combination (see FIGS. 71 to 73), and the number of map games (map reference game number) is determined according to the map type ( (See FIG. 74). Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to set a plurality of types of map games (number of staying games on the map) for a predetermined internal winning combination.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to give randomness to the type of the lock / actual effect while reducing the data necessary for the lock / actual effect (suppressing an increase in data relating to the lock / actual effect). While being able to produce more varied rock and functional effects).

  Further, as described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the sub game state is the “normal state” (RT1 or RT0 game state), the lock / function effect is performed based on the map. Is “ART state” (RT3 gaming state) and “preparation state at the time of transition to ART state” (RT2 or RT4 gaming state), the lock / function effect based on the map is not performed.

  That is, since the lock is frequently used in the “normal state” and is not locked in the “ART state”, the game time per unit game in the “normal state” is equal to the unit game in the “ART state” by the time of the lock. It will be longer than the game time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the player can feel a small amount of inserted medals per unit time in the “normal state”, and a large amount of medals obtained per unit time in the “ART state”. You can feel it.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the lock / function effect activated in the “normal state” is also a precursor effect informing the player of the ART winning or the “seven-matched pseudo bonus” winning. Therefore, in the “normal game”, showing the player with such a lock / function effect can increase the interest of the player in the “normal state”.

  Further, as described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the lock / combination effect based on the map, the movable accessory 23 is also activated simultaneously with the lock to perform the effect. That is, in the “normal state”, it is possible to show the player an effect in which the effect by the lock and the effect by the movable accessory 23 are linked. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the lock during the lock period in which the operation by the player is not accepted.

[Various effects that can be obtained with 7 bonuses]
As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the route 2 is provided in which the sub gaming state shifts from the “normal state” to the “ART first hit state” via the “7-matched pseudo bonus”. In this route 2, when the number of games (game number) added by adding the number of ART games performed during the “seven set pseudo bonus” reaches the predetermined number of games (100G in the present embodiment), The game of “hit state” (game with low ART continuation probability) is not performed, and a predetermined number of games are added and a lottery game is performed. After the predetermined number of games are added and the lottery game is digested, a “ART high continuation state” game (a game with a high ART continuation probability) is performed.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the number of games added by adding the number of ART games in the “7-matched pseudo bonus” reaches the predetermined number of games, the sub game state “ART high continuation” Transition to "state" is confirmed. Further, in this embodiment, even if the transition to the “ART high continuation state” is determined during the “7-matched pseudo bonus”, after the “7-matched pseudo bonus” is finished, a predetermined number of games are added and a lottery game is performed. Therefore, the amount of medals that can be acquired can be increased by increasing the number of games in the addition lottery game. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the “seven set pseudo bonus”.

[Various effects obtained in chance zone (continuous lock state)]
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific condition (in this embodiment, winning the continuous lock state transition lottery) is satisfied in the “normal state”, a predetermined maximum number of times (this “Chance zone” (“continuous lock state”) in which a unit game in which a reel effect and a lock are performed one or more times during a unit game is continuously executed within the range of a unit game of 10 games in the embodiment. Is provided as a sub game state.

  When the “chance zone” (“continuous lock state”) is maintained during the maximum number of unit games, the transition to the “ART state” of the sub game state is confirmed (a privilege is given to the player). ) In the present embodiment, when the maximum number of reel effects and locks are performed during the “chance zone” (when the value of the continuous lock state counter becomes “0”: YES determination in S95 in FIG. 106). Alternatively, when a predetermined lottery (S99 and S100 in FIG. 106) is won during the “chance zone”, the transition to the “ART state” of the sub gaming state is determined.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined guarantee period (three games in the present embodiment) has passed since the start of the “chance zone” (“continuous lock state”) in which reel production and locking are performed, Then, a lottery (S106 and S107 in FIG. 106) as to whether or not to end the “chance zone” is performed.

  That is, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the sub gaming state is shifted to the “ART state” during the “chance zone” period. In this determination, is the “chance zone” continued to the end? The condition for shifting to the “ART state” is whether the reel production and locking are performed the maximum number of times or a predetermined lottery is won. Further, during the “chance zone” (“continuous lock state”), whether or not to continue the “chance zone” is determined. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the privilege grant control in the “chance zone” (“continuous lock state”) does not become monotonous, and the player is granted privilege in the “chance zone” (for example, ART transfer) Can be expected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the third stop of the reel, a continuous lock state transition lottery process (see FIG. 132) is performed to determine whether or not the “chance zone” (“continuous lock state”) is won. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game in the non-chance zone.

  In the present embodiment, the type of reel effect and lock in the “chance zone” (“continuous lock state”) is determined for each game based on the internal winning combination (see FIGS. 57 to 59). Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to diversify lottery and further enhance the interest of the game.

  In this embodiment, in the “chance zone” (“continuous lock state”), the reel effect and the lock are performed at least at the start of the game. If a specific condition is satisfied, the reel Even after the third stop, reel production and locking are performed. Therefore, under specific conditions, the reel production timing and the occurrence timing of the lock can be made different, and an unexpected notification can be given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, during the “chance zone” (“continuous lock state”), the reel and the liquid crystal are not only locked but also a predetermined effect according to the count subtraction value or the value of the continuous lock state counter. To do. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the current count subtraction value or the value of the continuous lock state counter, and further increase the sense of expectation for granting benefits in the “chance zone”. it can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the reel effect code determination table (reel effect code determination table (reel effect pattern)) used for determining the reel effect and the lock effect pattern (reel effect pattern) executed during the “chance zone” (“continuous lock state”). In FIG. 61), another reel effect data selection index is defined in at least one of various reel effect code indexes defined for a predetermined reel effect data selection index. In this case, the amount of data related to the reel effect can be reduced, and the reel effect process can be simplified.

[Various effects obtained in ART state]
As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the addition flag lottery (the ART continuation probability) in the “ART first hit state” is lower than that in the “ART high continuation state” that is subsequently transferred. It is set to be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the “ART first hit state”, it is possible for the player to play the game with an emphasis on the winning of the ART continuous lottery, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the winning probability (ART continuation probability) of the addition flag lottery in the “ART first hit state” in the case where the “ART first hit state” is directly shifted from the “normal state” is set to the “normal state”. This is different from the case where the state shifts to “ART first hit state” via “7-set pseudo bonus”. Specifically, the continuation probability of ART in the latter case (50% in 40 games) is set higher than that in the former case (33% in 40 games). Therefore, in the present embodiment, interest can be given to the way of winning the ART, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, during the “7-matched pseudo bonus”, the pseudo bonus medium point lottery table (see FIG. 90) and the pseudo bonus medium extra lottery table (see FIG. 91) are used. An addition lottery for adding the number of games in the “ART state” to which the transition is made after completion of the “matched pseudo bonus” (refer to the process of 7 matched pseudo bonus in FIG. 142) is performed. Therefore, when the number of ART games is added by this addition lottery, the amount of medals earned in the “ART state” can be increased and the winning probability of the addition flag lottery (ART continuation probability) is substantially increased. Can be increased. In this case, the continuation probabilities of a plurality of ARTs can be set without separately providing a table for defining a winning probability (ART continuation probability) of a plurality of additional flag lotteries. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game without increasing the table data.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the result of the addition lottery in “7-set pseudo bonus” is a lottery (continuation of ART) indicating whether or not the sub gaming state shifts from “ART first hit state” to “ART high continuation state”. Probability). Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the “seven set pseudo bonus”.

  In the above embodiment, the ART continuation probability (33%) in the case of shifting to the “ART first hit state” in the route 1 is transferred to the “ART first hit state” in the route 2, and the “7-match pseudo bonus”. "Is lower than the ART continuation probability (50%) when there is no game addition (addition). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both ART continuation probabilities may be the same. Even in this case, if there is a game addition (addition) with “seven pseudo-bonus” in route 2, it is possible to increase the amount of medals obtained after shifting to the “ART first hit state” in route 2. The ART continuation probability can be substantially increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, as described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, in the “ART state” game, ART continuous lottery (ART extra flag lottery) is performed for each game (for each unit game). Then, when the ART continuation lottery is won (the ART of the next set is determined) and the number of games remains in the set, the number of ART games is added and lottery is performed in the remaining games.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the ART continuation lottery is won in the game in the middle of one set of the ART game period, the subsequent game will not be a simple digest game, so until the one set of games ends. A player can be allowed to play a game while maintaining the interest of the game.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the condition for adding the number of ART games after the ART continuation is determined in the mode 1 ART continuation lottery (low continuation probability lottery) is the mode 2 or 3 ART continuation lottery. It is preferentially given by the condition for adding lots of ART games to be played after the ART continuation is confirmed by (high continuation probability lottery) (see FIGS. 94 and 95). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the interest of the game can be further enhanced, particularly in the “ART first hit state” in which the mode 1 ART continuous lottery (low continuation probability lottery) is performed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the sub gaming state shifts from the “ART first hit state” to the “ART high continuation state”, the ART continuation probability increases in the “ART high continuation state” (83%), and the ART Is more likely to be continued multiple times, so that it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game in the “ART state”. In addition, when the continuation probability of ART in the “ART first hit state” is set low as in the present embodiment, the winning probability of the “ART first hit state” can be set high. Can increase the expectation of the person.

  Note that if the ART continuation probability (probability of winning a bonus) is set high in the “ART first hit state”, there is a risk of loss to the game store side, but in this embodiment, the “ART first hit state” Since the ART continuation probability (probability winning probability) is set low, such a problem can be solved.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of games added by adding the number of ART games in the “7-matched pseudo bonus” reaches a predetermined number of games, the “7-matched pseudo bonus” ends. The amount of medals that can be acquired by increasing the number of games in the “ART high continuation state” can be increased by adding lottery to a predetermined number of games to be performed later. Therefore, in this case, the interest of the game in the “ART high continuation state” can be further enhanced.

[Other effects]
As shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, in this embodiment, “AT winning” is determined by the map winning lottery in “normal state”, and the combination of symbols related to “RT3 Lip” is displayed on the winning determination line. The sub gaming state shifts from the “normal state” to the “ART state” (“ART first hit state”). On the other hand, when the “7 bonus bonus win” is determined by the map winning lottery in the “normal state” and the symbol combination related to “7 lip” is displayed on the winning determination line, the sub game state is “normal”. The state shifts from “state” to “7-match pseudo bonus”, and after “7-match pseudo bonus” is digested, shifts to “ART state” (“ART first hit state” or “ART high continuation state”).

  That is, in this embodiment, the combination of symbols that triggers when the sub gaming state shifts from the “normal state” to the “ART state” via the “seven-matched pseudo bonus”, the sub gaming state is “normal state”. ”Is different from the symbol combination that triggers the transition to“ ART state ”directly. Therefore, in this embodiment, the difference between the former transition route and the latter transition route in the sub gaming state can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the RT gaming state of “7-matched pseudo bonus” (“RT3 gaming state”) is made the same as the RT gaming state of “ART state”. Therefore, in this embodiment, an increase in prepared table data can be suppressed.

<Modification>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine (pachislot 1) according to the present invention are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications may be included without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims. Here, a modification of the present invention will be described.

  In the modified example, similarly to the above embodiment, when the sub game state is the “normal state”, the lock / function effect is frequently used, and when the sub game state is the “ART state”, the lock / function item is used. No directing.

  In order to execute the above operation, in the above-described embodiment, it is determined whether or not the RT gaming state has shifted to the RT2 gaming state, and the presence / absence of locking / acting effect switching is switched (movable accessory permission flag on / off control ) An example has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the modified example, when the reels are stopped in a predetermined pressing order (when the pressing order is correct), the corresponding symbol combination is always displayed, and the corresponding symbol combination may not be displayed in any other pressing order. On the basis of the determination result of whether or not a certain combination is displayed, the presence / absence of the lock / combination effect is switched.

  Specifically, in this example, in the state where the small part relating to “Bell” (“Bell” which may display “Bell spill” depending on the pressing order) is internally won, Based on the determination result of whether or not the symbol combination can be displayed, the presence / absence of the lock / actual effect is switched. As described in the transition flow of the RT gaming state in FIG. 97, when the symbol combination related to “Bell spill” is displayed, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. That is, when the symbol combination related to “bell spill” is displayed, the sub gaming state shifts to a “normal state” in which lock / function effects are frequently used. Therefore, the presence / absence of “bell” display (winning), which may display “bell spill” depending on the pressing order, can be used to determine the presence / absence of a lock / actual effect.

  In this example, when a symbol combination related to a specific “bell” is displayed in a state where the specific “bell” is internally won, it is determined that the sub gaming state is the “ART state” and the gaming state is locked.・ Set to a gaming state where the effect rendering does not work. In this case, for example, a gaming state is set in which the map is deleted or the lottery process of the lock / function effect production is stopped. On the other hand, when the symbol combination related to the specific “bell” is not displayed in a state where the specific “bell” is won internally (when the symbol combination related to the “bell bell” is displayed), the sub gaming state is It is determined that the navigation is not activated, that is, the “normal state”, and the gaming state is set to a gaming state in which a lock / actual effect can be executed. In this case, in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment, a lottery process of lock / function effect production, setting of a map, and the like are performed.

  In this example, when a symbol combination related to a specific “bell” is displayed in a predetermined game during a game period of a lock / actual effect based on a map, the currently executing map is turned off. May be. In addition, when the symbol combination related to “Bell Spill” is displayed in a predetermined game during the game period of the lock / actual effect production based on the map, for example, the next game regardless of the occurrence timing of the lock based on the map It is also possible to generate a lock.

  Next, a specific description will be given of a control method for realizing the above-described switching operation between the lock and the effect effect in this example with reference to the drawings. In addition, since various processes other than the rotation stop post-processing and the post-stop map setting process in this example are the same as the corresponding various processes described in the above embodiment, here, the post-rotation stop post-processing and the post-stop map The contents of the setting process will be described, and descriptions of other various processes will be omitted.

[After-rotation stop processing]
First, referring to FIG. 150, the post-rotation stop post-processing of this example performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 100) will be described. In this example, the post-rotation stop post-processing described below is executed by the main control circuit 41. Further, in the post-rotation stop processing in this example, when the symbol combination related to “Bell” is displayed, a state in which the lock / actual effect is not performed is set (the movable accessory permission flag is turned off). When the symbol combination related to “bell bell spill” is displayed, a state in which the lock / actual effect can be activated is set (the movable accessory permission flag is turned on).

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RT gaming state has shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (S631). In other words, in this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the “ART state” has ended due to the display of the symbol combination related to “Bell spill”, and the sub gaming state has shifted to the “normal state”. In S631, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT gaming state has not shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (when S631 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S633 described below.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S631 that the RT gaming state has shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (in the case where S631 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the sub management state transition lottery described in FIG. Processing is performed (S632). That is, the main CPU 51 performs the sub-management state transition lottery when the symbol combination related to “bell spill” is displayed and the “ART state” ends.

  Next, after the processing of S632 or when S631 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the map is currently being executed (S633). That is, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the current game is being executed with the map set. When the main CPU 51 determines that the map is not being executed in S633 (when S633 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S635 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S633 that the map is being executed (S633: YES), the main CPU 51 performs post-stop map setting processing (S634). Details of the post-stop map setting process in this example will be described later with reference to FIG. 151 described later.

  Next, after the processing of S634 or when S633 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a symbol combination related to “Bell” is displayed (S635).

  In S635, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination related to “Bell” is displayed (when S635 is YES), the main CPU 51 turns off the movable accessory permission flag (S636). By this process, the game state of the next game is set to a state in which no lock / actual effect is performed. Then, after the process of S636, the main CPU 51 ends the process after the rotating cylinder stop and moves the process to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S635 that the symbol combination related to “Bell” has not been displayed (NO in S635), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol combination related to “Bell spill” has been displayed. Is determined (S637).

  In S637, when the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol combination related to “bell spill” has not been displayed (when S637 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the post-rotation stop processing, and the processing is the main flow ( The process proceeds to S18 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S637 that the symbol combination related to “bell spill” has been displayed (YES in S637), the main CPU 51 turns on the movable accessory permission flag (S638). By this process, the game state of the next game is set to a state where the lock / actual effect is performed. Then, after the process of S638, the main CPU 51 ends the process after the rotating cylinder stop and moves the process to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 100).

[Map setting after stop]
Next, the post-stop map setting process performed in S634 in the flowchart (see FIG. 150) of the process after the rotating cylinder stop of this example will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of map games is “0” (S641). In S601, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of map games is not “0” (in the case where S641 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the map setting process after stopping and the process after the rotation stop (see FIG. 150).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S641 that the number of map games is “0” (when S641 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the holding flag is on (S642). .

  In S642, when the main CPU 51 determines that the holding flag is not on (in the case where S642 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the post-stop map setting process, and the process after the rotating cylinder stop (see FIG. 150). To S635. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S642 that the holding flag is on (when S642 is YES), the main CPU 51 turns off the holding flag (S643).

  Next, after the processing of S643, the main CPU 51 performs the map game number lottery processing described in FIG. 112 (S644). Next, the main CPU 51 performs the third post-stop lock setting process described with reference to FIG. 113 (S645). By the processing of S644 and S645, the gaming state is set to a state where the lock / actual effect based on the held map can be operated. After the process of S645, the main CPU 51 ends the post-stop map setting process, and moves the process to S635 of the post-rotation stop process (see FIG. 150).

[Effects]
In the modified example, in a gaming state where the pressing order when “BELL” is won is not navigated (“normal state”), the probability that the symbol combination related to “BELL” will not be displayed (the probability that the symbol combination related to “BELL spill” will be displayed) ) Increases, the probability of performing a lock / actual effect is increased. On the other hand, in the gaming state (“ART state”) in which the pushing order of the reels for displaying the symbol combination related to “Bell” is navigated, the lock / actual effect is not performed. That is, in this example, as in the above embodiment, when the sub game state is “normal state”, the lock is frequently used, and when the sub game state is “ART state”, the lock is not performed. .

  Therefore, in this example, similarly to the above embodiment, the game time per unit game in the “normal state” is longer than the game time per unit game in the “ART state” by the lock time. That is, in this example, the game time per unit game can be changed according to the sub game state. Specifically, the game time per unit game in the “normal state” can be extended, and the game time per unit game in the “ART state” can be shortened. Therefore, in this example, the player can feel a small amount of inserted medals per unit time in the “normal state” and feel a large amount of acquired medals per unit time in the “ART state”. Can be made.

  Further, in the pachislot 1, the sub game state often stays in the “normal state”, and the game in the “normal state” tends to be monotonous. However, in this example, as in the above-described embodiment, since the lock / function effect based on the map is performed in the “normal state”, the game in the “normal state” can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  That is, in this example as well, in the “normal state”, the game is not monotonous, and in the “ART state”, the increase in medal acquisition speed can be experienced, It can enhance interest.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachi-slot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior body, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Display window, 10 ... Liquid crystal teaching device, 17L ... Left stop button, 17C ... Middle stop button, 17R ... Right stop button, 22 ... Rotating decorative part (rotating accessory), 23 ... Moving decorative part (moving accessory), movable unit part ... 23a, 23b ... Light emitting element LED), 25 ... rotating member, 26 ... rotating position detecting mechanism, 26b ... rotating position detecting unit, 27 ... detecting element, 30 ... decorative frame, 41 ... main control circuit, 42 ... sub control circuit, 51 ... main CPU, 70: Base portion, 71: First movable unit, 72: Second movable unit, 73: Drive mechanism, 74: Detection element, 81: Sub CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine housing having a cabinet and a front door attached to the cabinet so as to be opened and closed;
A rotating decorative member provided on the front door for performing a predetermined effect;
A rotary ornament drive unit that is mounted inside the gaming machine casing and rotationally drives the rotary ornament member;
A rotational position detecting mechanism provided on the front door for detecting the rotational position of the rotating decorative member;
A rotation decoration unit effect control unit that is mounted inside the gaming machine casing and controls the operation of the rotation decoration member at the time of the predetermined effect;
With
The rotation decoration unit drive unit selects a specific rotation operation process from a plurality of types of rotation operation processes when performing the predetermined effect , and the rotation decoration member is in a basic position according to the selected rotation operation process. The rotating decorative member is operated so as to repeat forward rotation and reverse rotation sequentially from
The plurality of types of rotation operation processing are different in a stop period set between the forward rotation and the reverse rotation,
The rotation decoration part production control unit is configured to perform a plurality of types of stop operations based on information about a rotation state of the rotation decoration member when a predetermined operation that triggers the stop of the predetermined production by the rotation decoration member is detected. A gaming machine, wherein a specific stop operation process is selected from the processes, and the rotating decoration member is stopped at the basic position according to the selected stop operation process.

Images